MX611dhe - Printer LEXMARK - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL MX611dhe LEXMARK

October 2012 www.lexmark.com

Machine type(s):

7016

Model(s):

630, 670, 675, 679

Contents

Safety information....7

Learning about the printer....9

Finding information about the printer....9

Selecting a location for the printer....10

Printer configurations....11

Using the Embedded Web Server....13

Understanding the basic functions of the scanner....14

Using the ADF and scanner glass....14

Understanding the printer control panel....15

Using the printer control panel....15

Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights....15

Understanding the home screen....16

Using the touch-screen buttons....18

Setting up and using the home screen applications....20

Finding the IP address of the computer....20

Finding the IP address of the printer....21

Accessing the Embedded Web Server....21

Customizing the home screen....21

Understanding the different applications....22

Activating the home screen applications....22

Finding information about the home screen applications....22

Setting up Forms and Favorites 23

Setting up Card Copy 23

Using MyShortcut 24

Setting up Multi Send 25

Setting up Scan to Network 26

Setting up Remote Operator Panel....26

Exporting and importing a configuration....27

Additional printer setup....28

Installing internal options....28

Installing hardware options....45

Setting up the printer software....48

Attaching cables....49

Networking....51

Verifying printer setup....59

Loading paper and specialty media....60

Setting the paper size and type....60

Configuring Universal paper settings....60

Loading trays....60

Loading the multipurpose feeder....65

Using the standard bin and paper stop....70

Linking and unlinking trays....71

Paper and specialty media guide....74

Using specialty media....74

Paper guidelines....76

Supported paper sizes, types, and weights....79

Printing....83

Printing forms and a document....83

Printing from a flash drive....84

Printing confidential and other held jobs....86

Printing information pages....88

Canceling a print job....88

Copying....90

Making copies....90

Copying photos....91

Copying on specialty media....91

Customizing copy settings....92

Placing information on copies....98

Canceling a copy job....99

Understanding the copy options....99

E-mailing....102

Setting up the printer to e-mail....102

Creating an e-mail shortcut....103

E-mailing a document....104

Customizing e-mail settings....105

Canceling an e-mail....106

Understanding the e-mail options....106

Faxing....109

Setting up the printer to fax....109

Sending a fax....122

Creating shortcuts....125

Customizing fax settings....126

Canceling an outgoing fax....127

Holding and forwarding faxes....127

Understanding the fax options....128

Scanning....131

Using Scan to Network....131

Scanning to an FTP address....131

Scanning to a computer or flash drive....133

Understanding the scan options....136

Understanding the printer menus....139

Menus list....139

Paper menu....140

Reports Menu....150

Network/Ports menu....151

Security menu....160

Settings menu....165

Help menu....209

Saving money and the environment....211

Saving paper and toner....211

Saving energy....212

Recycling....216

Securing the printer....217

Statement of Volatility....217

Erasing volatile memory....217

Erasing non-volatile memory....218

Erasing printer hard disk memory....218

Configuring printer hard disk encryption....219

Finding printer security information....220

Maintaining the printer....221

Cleaning the printer parts....221

Checking the status of parts and supplies....223

Estimated number of remaining pages....223

Ordering supplies....223

Storing supplies....225

Replacing supplies....226

Moving the printer....232

Managing the printer....234

Finding advanced networking and administrator information....234

Checking the virtual display....234

Setting up e-mail alerts....234

Viewing reports....234

Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server....235

Restoring factory default settings....236

Clearing jams....237

Avoiding jams....237

Understanding jam messages and locations....238

[x]-page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx]....239

[x]-page jam, clear standard bin. [20y.xx]....240

[x]-page jam, open rear door. [20y.xx]....240

[x]-page jam, open front door. [20y.xx]....242

[x]-page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [23y.xx]....245

[x]-page jam, clear manual feeder. [25y.xx]....246

[x]-page jam, open tray [x]. [24y.xx]....247

[x]-page jam, remove all pages from the output bin. Leave paper in bin. [45y.xx]....248

[x]-page jam, remove all pages from the finisher's accumulator. Leave paper in bin. [45y.xx]....253

Troubleshooting....257

Understanding the printer messages....257

Solving printer problems....271

Solving print problems....278

Solving copy problems....304

Solving fax problems....308

Solving scanner problems....314

Solving home screen applications problems....319

Embedded Web Server does not open....319

Contacting customer support....320

Notices....321

Product information....321

Edition notice....321

Power consumption....325

Index....337

Safety information

Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.

Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions. You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:

• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
• If an optional tray is installed, then remove it from the printer. To remove the optional tray, slide the latch on the right side of the tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place.
• Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
• Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
• Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it.

Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.

Use only the telecommunications (RJ-11) cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.

This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.

Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all other trays closed until needed.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

Learning about the printer

Finding information about the printer

What are you looking for? Find it here
Initial setup instructions:•Connecting the printer•Installing the printer software	Setup documentation—The setup documentation came with the printer and is also available athttp://support.lexmark.com.
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:•Selecting and storing paper and specialty media•Loading paper•Configuring printer settings•Viewing and printing documents and photos•Setting up and using the printer software•Configuring the printer on a network•Caring for and maintaining the printer•Troubleshooting and solving problems	User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide—The guides may be available on the Software and Documentation CD.For more information, visithttp://support.lexmark.com.
Instructions for:•Connecting the printer to an Ethernet network•Troubleshooting printer connection problems	Networking Guide—Open the Software and Documentation CD, and then look for Printer and Software Documentation under the Pubs folder. From the list of publications, click the Networking Guide link.
Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software programor application, and then click Help.Click ? to view context-sensitive information.Notes:•Help is automatically installed with the printer software.•The printer software is located in the printer program folder or on the desktop, depending on your operating system.
The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer support:•Documentation•Driver downloads•Live chat support•E-mail support•Voice support	Lexmark Support Web site—http://support.lexmark.comNote:Select your country or region, and then select your product to view the appropriate support site.Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for your country or region can be found on the Support Web site or on the printed warranty that came with your printer.Record the following information (located on the store receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready when you contact customer support so that they may serve you faster:•Machine Type number•Serial number•Date purchased•Store where purchased
Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or	region:•In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited Warranty included with this printer, or athttp://support.lexmark.com.•In other countries and regions—See the printed warranty that came with your printer.

Selecting a location for the printer

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.

When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:

• Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee 156 standard.
• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
• Keep the printer:

—Clean, dry, and free of dust.
—Away from stray staples and paper clips.
—Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
—Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.

- Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:

Ambient temperature	15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Storage temperature	1 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)

- Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:

5 4 3 2 1

1 Right side 304.8 mm (12 in.)

2 Front 508 mm (20 in.)

3 Left side 203.2 mm (8 in.)

4 Rear 203.2 mm (8 in.)

5 Top 800 mm (31.49 in.)

Printer configurations

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all other trays closed until needed.

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

Basic model

Labeled diagram of a printer with numbered parts for identification

1 Display

2 Automatic document feeder (ADF)

3 ADF tray

4 ADF bin

5 Standard bin

6 Multipurpose feeder

7 Standard 550-sheet tray

Configured model

Two views of a printer showing internal components and part numbers (1, 2, 3), no text or symbols present.

1	Optional 250-sheet tray
2	Optional 550-sheet tray
3	Optional stapler

Using the Embedded Web Server

Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.

If the printer is installed on a network, then you can use the Embedded Web Server to do the following:

•View the virtual display of the printer control panel.
- Check the status of the printer supplies.
- Configure supply notifications.
- Configure printer settings.
- Configure network settings.
•View reports.

To access the Embedded Web Server for your printer:

1 Obtain the printer IP address:

•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
- By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section

Notes:

— An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
- If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

3 Press Enter.

The Embedded Web Server page appears.

Understanding the basic functions of the scanner

• Make quick copies or set the printer to perform specific copy jobs.
• Send a fax using the printer control panel.
• Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
• Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, or an FTP destination.
• Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF through an FTP).

Using the ADF and scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

Illustration of a printer with an ABC card being inserted, showing no text or symbols on the device itself.

Use the ADF for multiple-page documents including two-sided (duplex) pages.

3D rendering of a printer with a paper airplane in the open case, showing no text or symbols on the device itself.

Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

Using the ADF

When using the ADF:

• Load the document into the ADF tray faceup, short edge first.
• Load up to 50 sheets of plain paper into the ADF tray.
• Scan sizes from 105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 inches) wide to 216 x 368 mm (8.5 x 14.5 inches) long.
• Scan media weights from 52 to 120g / m^2 (14-32 lb).
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

Using the scanner glass

When using the scanner glass:

• Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the corner with the green arrow.
• Scan or copy documents up to 216 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) long.
  •Copy books up to 25.3 mm (1 inch) thick.

Understanding the printer control panel

Using the printer control panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

Use the To
1 Printer control panel		•View the printer status and messages.•Set up and operate the printer.
2 Home button Go to the home screen.
3 Sleep button Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep mode:Press any hard button.Open a door or cover.Send a print job from the computer.Perform a power-on reset (POR) with the main power switch.Attach a device to the USB port on the printer.
4 Keypad Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
5 Indicator light Check the status of the printer.
6 Start button		Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.
7 Cancel button Stop all printer activity.
8 Clear All / Reset button		Reset the default settings of a function, such as printing, copying, or e-mailing.

Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights

The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status or condition.

Indicator light color and its corresponding printer status

Indicator light Printer status
Off The printer is off or in Hibernate mode.
Blinking green The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
Solid green The printer is on, but idle.
Blinking red The printer requires user intervention.

Sleep button light color and its corresponding printer status

Sleep button light Printer status
Off The printer is off, idle or in Ready state.
Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode.
Blinking amber The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode.
Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes completely off for 1.9 seconds in a slow, pulsing pattern	The printer is in Hibernate mode.

Understanding the home screen

When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Touch the home screen buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu screen; or to respond to messages.

Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.

1 2 3 4 5 Change Language Copy Face Email FTP Search Hold Jobs Held Jobs USB Drive Bookmarks Forms and Favorites Page 1 / 2 6 7 14 Status / Supplies Ready. Touch any button to begin 13 2 12 11 10 9 8

Touch To
1	Change Language	Launch the Change Language pop-up window that lets you change the primary language of the printer.
2	Copy Access the Copy menus and make copies.
3	Fax Access the Fax menus and send fax.
4	E-mail	Access the E-mail menus and send e-mails.
5	FTP	Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server.
6 Arrows Scroll up or down.
7 Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms.
8 Menu icon Access the printer menus.Note: The menus are available only when the printer is in Ready state.
9	Bookmarks	Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URL) into a tree view of folders and file links.Note: The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function, and not from any other application.
10	USB Drive	View, select, print, scan, or e-mail photos and documents from a flash drive.Note: This icon appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or flash drive is connected to the printer.
11 Held Jobs Display all current held jobs.
12 Status/Supplies		Show a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue processing.Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and how to clear it.
13 Tips Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.
14 Search held jobs Search for one or more of the following items:User name for held or confidential print jobsJob names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobsProfile namesBookmark container or print job namesUSB container or print job names for supported file types

Features

Feature Description
Menu trail lineExample:Menus > Settings > Copy Settings >Number of Copies	A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature shows the path taken to arrive at the current menu.Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu.Number of Copies is not underlined because it is the current screen. If you touch an underlined word on the “Number of Copies” screen before the number of copies is set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does not become the default setting.
Attendance message alert	If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red indicator light blinks.
Warning	If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.
Status message bar	Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.Show printer conditions such as Toner Low or Cartridge Low.Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing.
Printer IP addressExample:123.123.123.123	The IP address of your network printer is located at the upper left corner of the home screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods. You can use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer.

Using the touch-screen buttons

Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary, depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.

Copy from Letter (8.5 x 11 in) Copy from Letter (8.5 x 11 in) Plain Paper Scale Auto 100% Darkness Side (Duplex) 1 to 2 Sided Collate On Content Text/Photo Save As Shortcut ? - 1 + Advanced Options Complete

	Touch To
1	Arrows View a list of options.
2	Copy It Print a copy.
3	Advanced Options Select a copy option.
4	Home Go to the home screen.
5	Increase Select a higher value.
6	Decrease Select a lower value.
7	Tips Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.

Other touch-screen buttons

Touch To
Accept	Save a setting.
Cancel	•Cancel an action or a selection.•Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes.
Reset	Reset values on the screen.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

Notes:

• Your home screen may vary, depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and active applications. Some applications are supported only in select printer models.
• There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. For more information, visit www.lexmark.com or inquire at your point of purchase.

Finding the IP address of the computer

Note: Make sure that you know how your printer and computer are connected to the network (Ethernet or wireless).

The computer IP address is required when setting up home screen applications, such as:

• Forms and Favorites
• Multi Send
• Scan to Network

For Windows users

1 Open the command window.

In Windows 8

From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:

Apps list > Run > type cmd > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type cmd.
c Press Enter, or click OK.

2 Type ipconfig, and then click Go or press Enter.

Note: Type ipconfig /all to see additional useful information.

3 Look for IP Address.

The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

For Macintosh users

Note: This is applicable only in Mac OS X version 10.5 or later.

1 From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Network
2 Click Ethernet, Wi-Fi, or AirPort.

3 Click Advanced > TCP/IP.
4 Look for IPv4 Address.

Finding the IP address of the printer

Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.

You can find the printer IP address:

• From the top left corner of the printer home screen.
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section.

Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

Accessing the Embedded Web Server

The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer.

1 Obtain the printer IP address:

•From the printer control panel home screen
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
- By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section

Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
3 Press Enter.

Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

Customizing the home screen

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Do one or more of the following:

•Show or hide the icons of basic printer functions.

a Click Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
b Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the home screen.

Note: If you clear a check box beside an icon, then the icon does not appear on the home screen. c Click Submit.

- Customize the icon for an application. For more information, see “Finding information about the home screen applications” on page 22 or see the documentation that came with the application.

Understanding the different applications

Use To
Card Copy	Scan and print both sides of a card on a single page. For more information, see “Setting up Card Copy” on page 23.
Fax	Scan a document, and then send it to a fax number. For more information, see “Faxing” on page 109.
Forms and Favorites	Quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen. For more information, see “Setting up Forms and Favorites” on page 23.
Multi Send	Scan a document, and then send it to multiple destinations. For more information, see “Setting up Multi Send” on page 25.
MyShortcut	Create shortcuts directly on the printer home screen. For more information, see “Using MyShortcut” on page 24.
Scan to E-mail	Scan a document, and then send it to an e-mail address. For more information, see “E-mailing” on page 102.
Scan to Computer	Scan a document, and then save it to a predefined folder on a host computer. For more information, see “Setting up Scan to Computer” on page 134.
Scan to FTP	Scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. For more information, see “Scanning to an FTP address” on page 131.
Scan to Network	Scan a document, and then send it to a network shared folder. For more information, see “Setting up Scan to Network” on page 26.

Activating the home screen applications

Finding information about the home screen applications

Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, you must first activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information on accessing the Embedded Web Server, see "Accessing the Embedded Web Server" on page 21.

For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications, do the following:

1 Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then do either of the following:

• Click Business Solutions, and then select the name of the application.
• Click Software and Solutions, and then select either of the following:

— Scan to Network—Find information about the Scan to Network application.

- Other Applications—Find information about the other applications.

2 Click the Manuals tab, and then select the document for the home screen application.

Setting up Forms and Favorites

Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.

Use To

Streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen.Note:The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site where the bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least areadaccess. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Forms and Favorites.

3 Click Add, and then customize the settings.

Notes:

• See the mouse-over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
- To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct, type the correct IP address of the host computer where the bookmark is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer, see "Finding the IP address of the computer" on page 20.
- Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located.

4 Click Apply.

To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.

Setting up Card Copy

Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.

Use To
	Quickly and easily copy insurance, identification, and other wallet-size cards.You can scan and print both sides of a card on a single page, saving paper and showing the information on the card in a more convenient manner.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Card Copy.

3 Change the default scanning options, if necessary.

• Default tray—Select the default tray to be used for printing scan images.
• Default number of copies—Specify the number of copies that should automatically print when the application is used.
• Default contrast setting—Specify a setting to increase or decrease the level of contrast when a copy of the scanned card is printed. Select Best for Content if you want the printer to adjust the contrast automatically.
• Default scale setting—Set the size of the scanned card when printed. The default setting is 100% (full size).
• Resolution setting—Adjust the quality of the scanned card.

Notes:

• When scanning a card, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 200 dpi for color, and 400 dpi for black and white.
• When scanning multiple cards, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 150 dpi for color, and 300 dpi for black and white.
• Print Borders—Select the check box to print the scan image with a border around it.

4 Click Apply.

To use the application, touch Card Copy on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions.

Using MyShortcut

Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.

Use To
	Create shortcuts on the printer home screen, with settings for up to 25 frequently used copy, fax, or e-mail jobs.

To use the application, touch MyShortcut, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.

Setting up Multi Send

Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.

Use To
	Scan a document, and then send the scanned document to multiple destinations.Note: Make sure there is enough space in the printer hard disk.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The printer IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Multi Send.
3 From the Profiles section, click Add, and then customize the settings.

Notes:

• See the mouse-over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
• If you select FTP or Share Folder as a destination, then make sure the location settings of the destination are correct. Type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified destination is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer, see "Finding the IP address of the computer" on page 20.

4 Click Apply.

To use the application, touch Multi Send on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.

Setting up Scan to Network

Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.

Use To

Scan a document and send it to a shared network folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder destinations.Notes:The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where the destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Scan to Network.

3 Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.

Notes:

• See the mouse-over help beside some of the fields for a description of the setting.
- To make sure the location settings of the destination are correct, type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified destination is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer, see "Finding the IP address of the computer" on page 20.
- Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the specified destination is located.

4 Click Apply.

To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.

Setting up Remote Operator Panel

This application shows the printer control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the printer control panel, even when you are not physically near the network printer. From your computer screen, you can view the printer status, release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks you might normally do while standing at the network printer.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Click Settings > Remote Operator Panel Settings.
3 Select the Enabled check box, and then customize the settings.
4 Click Submit.

To use the application, click Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC Applet.

Exporting and importing a configuration

You can export configuration settings into a text file, and then import the file to apply the settings to other printers.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 To export or import a configuration for one application, do the following:

a Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management.
b From the list of installed applications, click the name of the application you want to configure.
c Click Configure, and then do either of the following:

- To export a configuration to a file, click Export, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file.

Notes:

• When saving the configuration file, you can type a unique file name or use the default name.
• If a "JVM Out of Memory" error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration file is saved.

- To import a configuration from a file, click Import, and then browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer.

Notes:

• Before importing the configuration file, you can choose to preview it first or load it directly.
• If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click Apply.

3 To export or import a configuration for multiple applications, do the following:

a Click Settings > Import/Export.
b Do either of the following:

• To export a configuration file, click Export Embedded Solutions Settings File, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file.
  •To import a configuration file, do the following:

1 Click Import Embedded Solutions Settings File > Choose File, and then browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer.

2 Click Submit.

Additional printer setup

Installing internal options

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

Available internal options

- Memory card

-DDR3 DIMM

-Flash memory

-Fonts

- Firmware

Forms Barcode

Prescribe

IPDS

Printcryption

- Printer hard disk

•Lexmark ^TM Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)

- Parallel 1284-B interface

—MarkNet N8130 10/100 fiber interface

—MarkNet N8350 802.11 b/g/n Wireless Print Server

- RS-232-C serial interface

Accessing the controller board

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

1 Open the controller board access door.

Close-up of a computer monitor rear panel with a red arrow pointing to the front panel (no text or symbols visible)

2 Open the controller board shield using the green handle.

Diagram showing a device with a green plastic component being inserted, labeled with arrows indicating process steps.

3 Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connector.

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.

Labeled diagram of an electronic device interior showing components numbered 1 to 4 with visible wiring or connectors.

1 Memory card connector

2 Option card connector

3 Printer hard disk connector

4 Lexmark Internal Solutions Port connector

4 Close the shield, and then the access door.

Two views of a computer device showing internal components and a close-up view (no text or symbols visible)

Installing a memory card

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.

Note: An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the controller board.

1 Access the controller board.

For more information, see "Accessing the controller board" on page 29.

2 Unpack the memory card.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so may cause damage.

3 Align the notch (1) on the memory card with the ridge (2) on the connector.

Diagram of a green PCB with two views: one showing internal structure and the other showing a heat sink (no text or symbols present)

4 Push the memory card straight into the connector, and then push the card toward the controller board wall until it clicks into place.

Diagram showing a green circuit board with a red arrow pointing to its left side of a black heat sink component (no text or symbols present)

5 Close the controller board shield, and then the controller board access door.

Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see "Updating available options in the printer driver" on page 48.

Installing an optional card

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.

1 Access the controller board.

For more information, see "Accessing the controller board" on page 29.

2 Unpack the optional card.

Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.

3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the controller board.

Two diagrams showing a device with labeled components, one with a green base and blue legs, the other with a red arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols present)

4 Push the card firmly into place as shown in the illustration.

3D illustration of a microchip with a green base and red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Warning—Potential Damage: Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the controller board.

Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flushed against the controller board.

5 Close the controller board shield, and then the controller board access door.

Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see "Updating available options in the printer driver" on page 48.

Installing an Internal Solutions Port

The controller board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP).

Note: This task requires a flat-head screwdriver.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.

1 Open the controller board access door.

Close-up of a server rack with a red arrow pointing to the interior panel (no text or symbols visible)

2 Lightly press the stop on the left side of the access door, and then slide the access door to remove it.

Diagram showing three steps of a device's internal structure with red arrows indicating movement, labeled ①, ②, and ③.

3 Unpack the ISP kit.

Note: Make sure to remove and discard the small cable attached to the white connector.

Exploded view diagram of a device showing labeled parts including circuit board, connectors, and housing

1 ISP solution

2 Screw to attach the ISP to the bracket

3 ISP exterior cover

4 Screws to attach the ISP metal bracket to the printer cage

5 Plastic bracket

6 Long ISP cable

4 Place the plastic bracket inside the ISP exterior cover until it clicks into place.

Two technical diagrams showing a mechanical component with red arrows indicating force or movement, no text or symbols present.

5 Slide and push the ISP solution into the plastic bracket.

Two 3D diagrams showing a green component inside a black housing, with red arrows indicating direction of movement (no text or symbols present)

6 Secure the ISP solution to the plastic bracket using the long screw.

3D rendering of a green electronic device casing with a red-handled knob and indicator lights, no text or symbols present.

7 Tighten the two screws on the end of the ISP solution.

3D rendering of a device casing with green circuit board and red connectors, showing internal components and a magnified inset highlighting a red circular arrow (no text or symbols)

8 Attach the white plug of the ISP solution interface cable into the white receptacle on the ISP.

3D rendering of an electric vehicle battery pack with a highlighted internal component (no text or symbols visible)

9 Attach the ISP exterior cover at an angle by inserting the left hinges first.

Diagram showing a printer's internal structure with labeled parts and red arrows indicating motion, including numbered annotations.

10 Lower the rest of the cover, and then slide the cover to the right.

Technical diagram showing two views of a device with numbered annotations (3 and 4) highlighting features like a mechanical component and a highlighted section.

11 Run the ISP cable through the controller board shield.

Interior view of a computer setup showing an open drive with a green circuit board and a magnified inset highlighting a blue component (no text or symbols visible)

12 Open the shield using the green handle.

Diagram showing a computer motherboard with labeled parts and red arrows indicating motion directions

13 Attach the blue plug of the ISP solution interface cable into the blue receptacle on the controller board.

Note: If you have installed a printer hard disk, then you need to remove it. For more information, see "Removing a printer hard disk" on page 44. To reinstall the printer hard disk, see "Installing a printer hard disk" on page 41.

Interior view of a computer setup showing an open drive with a blue plastic component and a magnified inset highlighting the internal structure (no text or symbols visible)

14 Close the shield.

Interior view of a computer with an open drive showing internal components and a red arrow indicating the process (no text or symbols present)

15 Close the ISP exterior cover.

Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see "Updating available options in the printer driver" on page 48.

Installing a printer hard disk

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.

1 Access the controller board.

For more information, see "Accessing the controller board" on page 29.

2 Unpack the printer hard disk.

3 Install the printer hard disk on the controller board.

Warning—Potential Damage: Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly. Do not touch or press on the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage.

a Using a flat-head screwdriver, loosen the screws.

Diagram of a hard disk drive assembly with a magnified view showing the internal component (no text or symbols present)

b Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board.

Note: The plug and the receptacle are color-coded blue.

Illustration of a hand interacting with a blue 3D block and a wire mesh, with no visible text or symbols.

c Align the screws on the printer hard disk to the slots on the controller board bracket, and then slide the printer hard disk onto the brackets.

Interior view of a computer monitor case showing internal components and a green circuit board (no text or symbols visible)

d Tighten the two screws.

Interior view of a computer with a close-up of the internal components, showing a knob and ventilation system (no text or symbols visible)

4 Close the controller board shield, and then close the controller board access door.

Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating available options in the printer driver” on page 48.

Removing a printer hard disk

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.

1 Access the controller board.

For more information, see "Accessing the controller board" on page 29.

Note: This task requires a flat-head screwdriver.

2 Loosen the screws that connect the printer hard disk to the controller board bracket.

Interior view of a computer with a green internal panel and a magnified inset showing a red arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

3 Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the receptacle in the controller board, leaving the cable attached to the printer hard disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling the cable out.

Illustration of a hand holding a blue electronic component with a magnifying glass nearby, showing internal wiring and components (no text or symbols)

4 Hold the printer hard disk by the edges, and then remove it from the printer.

5 Close the controller board shield, and then close the access door.

Installing hardware options

Order of installation

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

Install the printer and any hardware options you have purchased in the following order:

• Printer stand
• Optional 250- or 550-sheet tray
  •Printer

For more information on installing a printer stand, optional 250- or 550-sheet tray, or spacer, see the setup sheet that came with the option.

Installing optional trays

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

1 Turn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

Illustration of a computer monitor with an arrow pointing to it, showing cable and port connections (no text or symbols present)

Diagram showing connection between a power outlet and a printer, with numbered annotations indicating components.

2 Unpack the tray, and then remove all packing material.

3 Pull out the tray from the base.

Interior view of an electronic device showing a black case with internal components and a red arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

4 Remove any packing material from inside the tray.

5 Insert the tray into the base.

6 Place the tray near the printer.

7 Align the printer with the tray, and then slowly lower the printer into place.

Note: Optional trays lock together when stacked.

Exterior view of a modern office building (no signage)

8 Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.

Diagram showing printer connection with labeled parts: paper holder, cable, and magnified view of printer assembly

Illustration of a printer with a close-up of its screen and cable, no text or symbols present

Notes:

• When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see "Updating available options in the printer driver" on page 48.
• To uninstall the optional trays, slide the latch on the right side of the printer toward the front of the printer until it clicks into place, and then remove stacked trays one at a time from the top to the bottom.

Setting up the printer software

Installing the printer software

Notes:

• If you installed the printer software on the computer before but need to reinstall the software, then uninstall the current software first.
• Close all open software programs before installing the printer software.

1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.

• From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.
  •From our Web site:
  Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
  SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system

2 Double-click the software installer package.

Wait for the installation dialog to appear.

If you are using a Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:

In Windows 8

From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:

Apps list > Run > type D: \setup.exe > OK.

In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
c Press Enter, or click OK.

In Macintosh

Click the CD icon on the desktop.

Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.

3 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Updating available options in the printer driver

When any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for use.

For Windows users

1 Open the printers folder.

In Windows 8

From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:

Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.

2 Depending on your device, do either of the following:

- Press and hold the printer you want to update.

- Right-click the printer you want to update.

3 From the menu that appears, do either of the following:

- For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.

- For earlier versions, select Properties.

4 Click the Configuration tab.

5 Do either of the following:

- Click Update Now - Ask Printer.

- Under Configuration Options, manually add any installed hardware options.

6 Click Apply.

For Macintosh users

1 From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:

- System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver

- System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver

2 Add any installed hardware options, and then click OK.

Attaching cables

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product for or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.

Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or to the network using an Ethernet cable.

Make sure to match the following:

•The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
•The appropriate Ethernet cable with the Ethernet port

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, or the printer in the area shown while actively printing or scanning. Loss of data or a malfunction can occur.

Diagram of a printer internal structure with numbered labels pointing to different ports or components.

	Use the To
1 Printer power cord socket		Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
2 Power switch Turn the printer on or off.
3 Ethernet port Connect the printer to an Ethernet network.
4	EXT port	Connect additional devices (telephone or answering machine) to the printer and the telephone line. Use this port if you do not have a dedicated fax line for the printer and if this connection method is supported in your country or region.Note: Remove the adapter plug to access the port.
5	LINE port	Connect the printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall jack (RJ-11), DSL filter, or VoIP adapter, or any other adapter that allows you to access the telephone line to send and receive faxes.
6 USB port Attach a supported printer keyboard.
7 USB printer port Connect the printer to a computer.
8 Security slot Attach a lock that will secure the printer in place.

Networking

Notes:

•Purchase a MarkNet ^TM N8350 wireless network adapter first before setting up the printer on a wireless network. For information on installing the wireless network adapter, see the instruction sheet that came with the adapter.
- A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA), WPA2, and 802.1X-RADIUS are types of security used on a network.

Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network

To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you begin:

Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing the printer.

• A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network
  •The network gateway
  •The network mask
  •A nickname for the printer (optional)

Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can choose to use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.

You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer can physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a damaged cable.

Installing the printer on an Ethernet network

For Windows users

1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.

• From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.

•From our Web site:

Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:

SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system

2 Double-click the software installer package.

Wait for the installation dialog to appear.

If you are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:

In Windows 8

From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:

Apps list > Run > type: D:\setup.exe>OK

In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
c Press Enter, or click OK.

Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.

3 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4 Select Ethernet connection, and then click Continue.
5 Attach the Ethernet cable when instructed to do so.
6 Select the printer from the list, and then click Continue.

Note: If the configured printer does not appear in the list, then click Modify Search.

7 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

For Macintosh users

1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.
2 Obtain the printer IP address either:

•From the printer control panel
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
- By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section

Note: You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.

3 Install the printer driver on the computer.

a Insert the Software and Documentation CD, and then double-click the installer package for the printer.
b Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
c Select a destination, and then click Continue.
d From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
e Type the user password, and then click OK.

All the necessary applications are installed on the computer.

f Click Close when installation is complete.

4 Add the printer.

- For IP printing:

a From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:

— System Preferences > Print & Scan

— System Preferences > Print & Fax

b Click+.

c Click the IP tab.
d Type the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.

- For AppleTalk printing:

Notes:

—Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.

—This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5.

a From the Apple menu, navigate to: System Preferences > Print & Fax

b Click +, and then navigate to: AppleTalk > select your printer > Add

Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network

Notes:

• Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
• Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.

Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:

• SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
• Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.
• Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.

Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select.

• Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:

—WEP key

If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.

—WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase

WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network.

-802.1X-RADIUS

If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:

• Authentication type
• Inner authentication type
  •802.1X user name and password
  •Certificates

—No security

If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.

Note: We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network.

Notes:

- If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless utility of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID or the security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access point, or contact your system support person.

- To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation that came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or consult your system support person.

Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard

Before you begin, make sure that:

• A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
• An Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer.
• Active NIC is set to Auto. To set this to Auto, navigate to:

Network/Ports > Active NIC > Auto > Submit

Note: Make sure to turn off the printer, then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the printer back on.

1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup

2 Select a wireless connection setup.

Use To
Search for networks Show available wireless connections. Note: This menu item shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs.
Enter a network name Manually type the SSID. Note: Make sure to type the correct SSID.
Wi-Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi-Fi Protected Setup.

3 Follow the instructions on the printer display.

Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi-Fi Protected Setup

Before you begin, make sure that:

• The access point (wireless router) is Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) certified or WPS-compatible. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
• A wireless network adapter installed in your printer is attached and working properly. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.

Using the Push Button Configuration method

1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup > Wi-Fi Protected p > Start Push Button Method

2 Follow the instructions on the printer display.

Using the Personal Identification Number (PIN) method

1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup > Wi-Fi Protected Setup > Start PIN Method

2 Copy the eight-digit WPS PIN.
3 Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field.

Notes:

• The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

4 Access the WPS settings. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access point.

5 Enter the eight-digit PIN, and then save the setting.

Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server

Before you begin, make sure that:

- Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network.

- A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless.
3 Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point (wireless router).

Note: Make sure to enter the correct SSID, security method, preshared key or passphrase, network mode, and channel.

4 Click Submit.
5 Turn off the printer, and then disconnect the Ethernet cable. Then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
6 To verify if your printer is connected to the network, print a network setup page. Then in the Network Card [x] section, see if the status is Connected.

Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port

When a new Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed in the printer, the printer configurations on computers that access the printer must be updated since the printer will be assigned a new IP address. All computers that access the printer must be updated with this new IP address.

Notes:

• If the printer has a static IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations.
• If the computers are configured to use the network name, instead of an IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to your computer configurations.
• If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet connection, then make sure the printer is disconnected from the Ethernet network when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly. If the printer is connected to the Ethernet network, then the wireless configuration completes, but the wireless ISP is inactive. To activate the wireless ISP, disconnect the printer from the Ethernet network, turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
• Only one network connection is active at a time. To switch between Ethernet and wireless connection types, turn off the printer, connect the cable (to switch to an Ethernet connection) or disconnect the cable (to switch to a wireless connection), and then turn the printer back on.

For Windows users

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Open the printers folder.

In Windows 8

From the Search charm, type Run and then navigate to:

Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click , or click Start and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.

3 To select the printer that has changed, do either of the following:

• Press and hold the printer, and then select Printer properties.
• Right-click the printer, and then select Printer properties (Windows 7 or later) or Properties (earlier versions).

Note: If there is more than one copy of the printer, then update all of them with the new IP address.

4 Click the Ports tab.
5 Select the port from the list, and then click Configure Port.

6 Type the new IP address in the "Printer Name or IP Address" field.

7 Click OK > Close.

For Macintosh users

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Add the printer.

•For IP printing:

a From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:

— System Preferences > Print & Scan

— System Preferences > Print & Fax

b Click+.

c Click the IP tab.

d Type the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.

- For AppleTalk printing:

Notes:

—Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.

—This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5.

a From the Apple menu, navigate to:

System Preferences > Print & Fax

b Click +, and then navigate to:

AppleTalk > select the printer > Add

Setting up serial printing

Use serial printing to print when the computer is far from the printer or to print at a reduced speed.

After installing the serial or communication (COM) port, configure the printer and the computer. Make sure you have connected the serial cable to the COM port on your printer.

1 Set the parameters in the printer.

a From the printer control panel, navigate to the menu for the port settings.

b Locate the menu for the serial port settings, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.

c Save the modified settings, and then print a menu settings page.

2 Install the printer driver.

a Obtain a copy of the software installer package.

• From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer

•From our Web site:

Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:

SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system

b Double-click the software installer package.

Wait for the installation dialog to appear.

If you are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:

In Windows 8

From the Search charm type run, and then navigate to:

Apps list > Run > type D : \setup.exe > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier

1 Click 📄 or click Start, and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
3 Press Enter or click OK.

Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.

c Click Install.

d Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

e Select Advanced, and then click Continue.

f From the Configure Printer Connection dialog, select a port.

g If the port is not in the list, then click Refresh, or navigate to:

Add port > select a port type > enter the necessary information > OK

h Click Continue > Finish.

3 Set the COM port parameters.

After installing the printer driver, set the serial parameters in the COM port assigned to the printer driver.

Note: Make sure the serial parameters in the COM port match the serial parameters you set in the printer.

a Open Device Manager.

In Windows 8

From the Search charm, type run and then navigate to:

Apps list > Run > type devmgmt.msc > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier

1 Click 📄 or click Start, and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run dialog, type devmgmt.msc.
3 Press Enter or click OK.

b Double-click Ports (COM & LPT) to expand the list of available ports.

c Do either of the following:

• Press and hold the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
• Right-click the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).

d From the menu that appears, select Properties.

e On the Port Settings tab, set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters set in the printer. Check the serial heading of the menu settings page for the printer settings.

f Click OK, and then close all the dialogs.

g Print a test page to verify printer installation.

Verifying printer setup

When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up correctly by printing the following:

• Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly. Remove the option, and then install it again.
• Network setup page—If your printer has Ethernet or wireless capability and is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.

Printing a menu settings page

From the home screen, navigate to:

Reports > Menu Settings Page

Printing a network setup page

If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Reports > Network Setup Page

2 Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.

If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning. Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.

Loading paper and specialty media

The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 237 and “Storing paper” on page 78.

Setting the paper size and type

From the home screen, navigate to:

Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type > Submit

Notes:

• The Paper Size setting is automatically set according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the standard 550-sheet tray (Tray 1) and the multipurpose feeder.
• The Paper Size setting for Tray 1 and the multipurpose feeder must be set manually in the Paper Size menu.
  •The factory default Paper Type setting is Plain Paper.
• The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays.

Configuring Universal paper settings

The Universal paper size is a user-defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus.

Notes:

• The smallest supported Universal size is 76.2 × 76.2 ~mm (3 x 3 inches).
  •The largest supported Universal size is 215.9 x 359.92 mm (8.5 x 14.17 inches).

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select the unit of measure >

2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.

3 Select the width or height, and then touch.

Loading trays

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all other trays closed until needed.

1 Pull out the tray completely.

Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the printer display. Doing so may cause a jam.

Exterior view of a printer with open lid and red arrow indicating compression (no text or symbols)

2 Squeeze, and then slide the width guide tab to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading.

Diagram of a printer's internal structure with numbered annotations indicating component locations

3 Squeeze, and then slide the length guide tab to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading.

Diagram of a printer internal structure with numbered annotations highlighting components and directional arrows

Notes:

• For some paper sizes like letter, legal, and A4, squeeze, and then slide the length guide tab backward to accommodate their length.
• When loading legal-size paper, the length guide extends beyond the base leaving the paper exposed to dust. To protect the paper from dust, you can purchase a dust cover separately. For more information, contact customer support.
• If you are loading A6-size paper in the standard tray, squeeze, and then slide the length guide tab toward the center of the tray to the A6-size position.
• Make sure the width and length guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray.

3D rendering of a printer's internal structure with two circular insets showing internal components (no text or symbols visible)

4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Illustration showing three-step folding process: cutting, folding, and holding a flat object with red directional arrows indicating movement.

5 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown.

3D illustration of a printer with a red downward arrow indicating compression or loss (no text or symbols)

- There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not, and whether two sided printing is needed.

Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher

ABC

One-sided printing

White mechanical device with green and black components, labeled 'ABC' on the cover (no readable text beyond label)

One-sided printing

White electronic device with black modules and a paper labeled 'ABC' on top (no additional text or symbols visible)

Two-sided (duplex) printing

White paper holder with green and black plastic components, no visible text or symbols on the body

Two-sided (duplex) printing

- Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator located on the side of the width guide. Overfilling may cause paper jams.

3D rendering of a printer drawer with a black mouse cursor icon pointing to the left side (no text or symbols on the device itself)

6 Insert the tray.

Exterior view of a printer with a red arrow pointing to the paper slot (no text or symbols visible)

7 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Note: Set the correct paper size and paper type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.

Loading the multipurpose feeder

Use the multipurpose feeder when printing on different paper sizes and types or specialty media, such as card stock, transparencies, paper labels, and envelopes. You can also use it for single-page print jobs on letterhead.

1 Open the multipurpose feeder.

Diagram of a printer with labeled parts and red arrows indicating motion, showing internal structure and zoomed-in detail.

a Pull the multipurpose feeder extender.

Close-up of a white printer with a red arrow pointing to its side panel, showing internal structure (no text or symbols visible)

b Pull the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open.

Close-up of a printer's internal structure showing paper feed and paper tray, with a red arrow indicating the paper's left side (no text or symbols visible)

2 Squeeze the tab on the left width guide, and then move the guides for the paper you are loading.

Diagram showing printer printing process with numbered steps and red arrows indicating motion direction

3 Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading.

- Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Three-step illustration showing a folding process: cutting a sheet with red arrows, folding into a flat surface, and holding a folded paper (no text or symbols)

- Hold transparencies by the edges. Flex the stack of transparencies back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Note: Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.

Three-step illustration showing hands holding a document with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

- Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Three-step illustration showing hand positioning and folding of a mechanical part (no text or symbols)

4 Load the paper or specialty media.

Notes:

- Do not force paper or specialty media into the multipurpose feeder.

- Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator located on the paper guides. Overfilling may cause paper jams.

Illustration of a printer with paper being inserted, showing a red arrow indicating the process (no text or symbols present)

- Load paper, transparencies, and card stock with the recommended printable side faceup and the top edge entering the printer first. For more information on loading transparencies, see the packaging that the transparencies came in.

3D printer printer with a paper feed showing a red arrow (no text or symbols visible)

Close-up of a printer's paper feed with a red arrow indicating paper movement (no text or symbols visible)

Note: When loading A6-size paper, make sure the multipurpose feeder extender rests lightly against the edge of the paper so that the last few sheets of paper remain in place.

Close-up of a printer's internal structure with a magnified inset showing the blade and paper plane (no text or symbols visible)

- Load letterhead faceup with the top edge entering the printer first. For two-sided (duplex) printing, load letterhead facedown with the bottom edge entering the printer first.

Letterhead

- Load envelopes with the flap on the left side facedown.

Illustration of a printer's internal processing device with red directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or self-stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.

5 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper or specialty media loaded in the multipurpose feeder.

Using the standard bin and paper stop

The standard bin holds up to 150 sheets of 20-lb paper. It collects prints facedown. The standard bin includes a paper stop that keeps paper from sliding out the front of the bin as it stacks.

To open the paper stop, pull it so that it flips forward.

Close-up of a white car door with a black cover and a red arrow symbol on the front panel (no text or numbers visible)

Note: Close the paper stop when moving the printer to another location.

Linking and unlinking trays

When the paper size and paper type for any trays are the same, the printer links those trays. When one linked tray becomes empty, paper feeds from the next linked tray. We recommend giving all unique paper, such as letterhead and different colored plain papers, a different custom type name so that the trays they are in do not automatically link.

Linking and unlinking trays

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Paper Menu.

3 Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.

• To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.
• To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.

4 Click Submit.

Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more information, see "Setting the paper size and type" on page 60.

Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur if settings are not properly configured.

Creating a custom name for a paper type

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.

3 Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.

4 Click Submit.

5 Click Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Paper Menu > Custom Names

2 Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.

3 Touch

4 Touch Custom Types, and then verify that the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.

Assigning a custom paper type

Using the Embedded Web Server

Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.

3 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type

Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user-defined custom names.

4 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Paper Menu > Custom Types

2 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type

Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user-defined custom names.

3 Touch

Configuring a custom name

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

- View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

- If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3 Select a custom name you want to configure, then select a paper or specialty media type, and then click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Paper Menu > Custom Types

2 Select a custom name you want to configure, and then touch √.

Paper and specialty media guide

Using specialty media

Tips on using letterhead

- Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.

• Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Before loading letterhead, flex, fan, and straighten the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
• Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. For information on how to load letterhead, see:

—“Loading trays” on page 60

—“Loading the multipurpose feeder” on page 65

Tips on using transparencies

• Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Feed transparencies from the standard tray, or the multipurpose feeder.
• Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Transparencies must be able to withstand temperatures up to 185°C (365°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting, or releasing hazardous emissions.

Note: If the transparency weight is set to Heavy and the transparency texture is set to Rough in the Paper menu, then transparencies can be printed at a temperature up to 195^ C ( 383^ F).

• Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems.
• Before loading transparencies, flex, fan, and straighten the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.

Tips on using envelopes

Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.

• Use envelopes designed specifically for laser/LED printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure that the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 220°C (446°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or releasing hazardous emissions.
• For best performance, use envelopes made from 90g / m^2 (24 lb bond) paper or 25% cotton. All-cotton envelopes must not exceed 70g / m^2 (20 lb bond) weight.
• Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.
• To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:

—Have excessive curl or twist
—Are stuck together or damaged in any way
—Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
—Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars
—Have an interlocking design
—Have postage stamps attached

—Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
—Have bent corners
—Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes

- Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.

Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and the high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.

Tips on using labels

Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.

Note: Use only paper label sheets. Vinyl, pharmacy, and two-sided labels are not supported.

For more information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available at http://support.lexmark.com.

When printing on labels:

• Use labels designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:
• The labels can withstand temperatures up to 230^ (446°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.
• Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 25-psi (172-kPa) pressure without delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.

- Do not use labels with slick backing material.

- Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and toner cartridge warranties.

- Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.

- Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die-cuts of the label.

- Make sure the adhesive backing does not reach to the edge of the sheet. Zone coating of the adhesive should be at least 1 mm (0.04 inches) away from edges. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty.

- If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, then remove a 2-mm (0.06-inches) strip on the leading and driver edge, and use a non-oozing adhesive.

- Portrait orientation is recommended, especially when printing bar codes.

Tips on using card stock

Card stock is heavy, single-ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness, and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities.

•From the Paper menu, set the Paper Type to Card Stock.
- Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting.
- Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper handling problems.
- Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 220°C (446°F) without releasing hazardous emissions.

• Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting introduces semi-liquid and volatile components into the printer.
• Use grain short card stock when possible.

Paper guidelines

Selecting the correct paper or specialty media reduces printing problems. For the best print quality, try a sample of the paper or specialty media before buying large quantities.

Paper characteristics

The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating new paper stock.

Weight

The standard printer trays can automatically feed paper weights up to 90-g/m^2 (24-lb) bond grain long paper. The optional trays can automatically feed paper weights up to 120-g/m^2 (32-lb) bond grain long paper. The multipurpose feeder can automatically feed paper weights up to 163-g/m^2 (43-lb) bond grain long paper. Paper lighter than 60 g/m^2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75-g/m^2 (20-lb) bond grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 × 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 inches), it is recommended to use 90 g/m^2 (24 lb) or heavier paper.

Note: Two-sided printing is supported only for 60–90-g/m ^2 (16–24-lb) bond paper.

Curl

Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems.

Smoothness

Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points; smoothness between 150–250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.

Moisture content

The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly. Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance.

Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24–48 hours before printing. Extend the time to several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.

Grain direction

Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.

For 60–90-g/m ^2 (16–24-lb) bond paper, grain long paper is recommended.

Fiber content

Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.

Unacceptable paper

The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:

• Chemically-treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
• Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
• Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
• Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater or lesser than ±/± 2.5 mm ( +/-0.10 inch), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
  In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms:

•Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
- Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers
•Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)
•Paper weighing less than 60 g/m ^2 (16 lb)
• Multiple-part forms or documents

Selecting paper

Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble-free printing.

To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:

•Always use new, undamaged paper.
- Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on the paper package.
- Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
- Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
- Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.

Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead

Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:

• Use grain long for 60 to 90g / m^2 (16 to 24 lb) weight paper.
• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
• Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.

Use papers printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230^ C ( 446^ F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not. When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.

Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230^ C ( 446^ F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.

Using recycled paper and other office papers

As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser (electrophotographic) printers. In 1998, Lexmark presented to the US government a study demonstrating that recycled paper produced by major mills in the US fed as well as non-recycled paper. However, no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well.

Lexmark consistently tests its printers with recycled paper (20–100% post-consumer waste) and a variety of test paper from around the world, using chamber tests for different temperature and humidity conditions. Lexmark has found no reason to discourage the use of today's recycled office papers, but generally the following property guidelines apply to recycled paper.

•Low moisture content (4–5%)
- Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheffield units, or 140–350 Bendtsen units, European)

Note: Some much smoother papers (such as premium 24 lb laser papers, 50–90 Sheffield units) and much rougher papers (such as premium cotton papers, 200–300 Sheffield units) have been engineered to work very well in laser printers, despite surface texture. Before using these types of paper, consult your paper supplier.

• Suitable sheet-to-sheet coefficient of friction (0.4–0.6)
• Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed

Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 g/m ^2 [16 lb bond]) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils [0.1 mm]), and paper that is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is required for reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser (electrophotographic) printing, consult your paper supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these guidelines may still cause paper feeding problems in any laser printer (for example, if the paper curls excessively under normal printing conditions).

Storing paper

Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:

• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21^ C ( 70^ F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent. Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24^ C ( 65–75^ F) with relative humidity between 40 and 60 percent.
• Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
• Store individual packages on a flat surface.
• Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
• Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and wrapper help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.

Supported paper sizes, types, and weights

Supported paper sizes

Paper size and dimension	Standard550-sheet tray	Optional 250- or550-sheet tray	Multipurposefeeder	ADF Scannerglass	Duplexmode
Business card X X X X					X
3 x 5 X X			✓	X	X
4 x 6 X X			✓	X	X
A4210 x 297 mm(8.27 x 11.7 in.)	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓
A5148 x 210 mm(5.83 x 8.27 in.)	✓	✓	✓	✓	X
A6105 x 148 mm(4.13 x 5.83 in.)	✓	X	✓	✓	X
JIS B5182 x 257 mm(7.17 x 10.1 in.)	✓	✓	✓	✓	X
Letter215.9 x 279.4 mm(8.5 x 11 in.)	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓
Legal215.9 x 355.6 mm(8.5 x 14 in.)	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓
Executive184.2 x 266.7 mm(7.25 x 10.5 in.)	✓	✓	✓	✓	X
Oficio (México)215.9 x 340.4 mm(8.5 x 13.4 in.)	✓	✓	✓	✓	X
Folio215.9 x 330.2 mm(8.5 x 13 in.)	✓	✓	✓	✓	X
Statement139.7 x 215.9 mm(5.5 x 8.5 in.)	✓	✓	✓	✓	X

* To support two-sided (duplex) printing, the Universal width must be between 76.2 mm (3 in.) and 215.9 mm (8.5 in.); the Universal length must be between 76.2 mm (3 in.) and 359.92 mm (14.17 in.).

Paper size and dimension	Standard550-sheet tray	Optional 250- or550-sheet tray	Multipurposefeeder	ADF Scannerglass	Duplexmode
Universal*76.2 x 76.2 mm to215.9 x 359.92 mm(3 x 3 in. to 8.5 x 14.17 in.)	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓
7 3/4 Envelope (Monarch)98.4 x 190.5 mm(3.875 x 7.5 in.)	X	X	✓	X	X
9 Envelope98.4 x 226.1 mm(3.875 x 8.9 in.)	X	X	✓	X	X
10 Envelope104.8 x 241.3 mm(4.12 x 9.5 in.)	X	X	✓	X	X
DL Envelope110 x 220 mm(4.33 x 8.66 in.)	X	X	✓	X	X
C5 Envelope162 x 229 mm(6.38 x 9.01 in.)	X	X	✓	X	X
B5 Envelope176 x 250 mm(6.93 x 9.84 in.)	X	X	✓	X	X
Other Envelope85.7 x 165 mm to215.9 x 355.6 mm(3.375 x 6.50 in. to8.5 x 14 in.)	X	X	✓	X	X
* To support two-sided (duplex) printing, the Universal width must be between 76.2 mm (3 in.) and 215.9 mm (8.5 in.); the Universal length must be between 76.2 mm (3 in.) and 359.92 mm (14.17 in.).

Supported paper types and weights

Note: Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at a reduced speed.

Paper type Standard	550-sheet tray	250- or 550-sheet tray	Multipurpose feeder	Duplex mode ADF Scanner glass
Plain paper	√	√	√	√	√	√
Card stock X X X			√		√	√
Transparencies X		^1	√	X	√	√
^1 Transparencies are supported only in the 250-sheet tray. ^2 Use envelopes that lie flat when individually placed on a table facedown.

X

Paper type Standard	550-sheet tray	250- or 550-sheet tray	Multipurpose feeder	Duplex mode ADF Scanner glass
Recycled	√	√	√	√	√	√
Paper labels X	√	√	√		√	√
Bond X X X			√		√	√
Envelope^2	√	√	√	√	√	√
Rough envelope X X X			√		√	√
Letterhead	√	√	√	√	√	√
Preprinted	√	√	√	√	√	√
Colored paper	√	√	√	√	√	√
Light paper	√	√	√	√	√	√
Heavy paper	√	√	√	√	√	√
Rough/Cotton X	√	√	√		√	√
Custom Type [x]	√	√	√	√	√	√
^1 Transparencies are supported only in the 250-sheet tray. ^2 Use envelopes that lie flat when individually placed on a table facedown.

Paper sizes, types, and weights supported by the optional finisher

Supported paper sizes

Paper size Dimensions Staple finisher
A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 in.) X
A5 148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in.) X
A6 105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 in.) X
JIS B5 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.) X
Letter	216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in.)	√
Legal	216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.)	√
Executive	184 x 267 mm (7.3 x 10.5 in.) X
Oficio (México)	216 x 340 mm (8.5 x 13.4 in.)	√
Folio	216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in.)	√
Statement	140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in.)	X
Universal7 3/4 Envelope (Monarch) 98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 in.) X	105 x 216 mm to 216 x 356 mm(4.13 x 8.5 in. to 8.5 x 14 in.)	X
9 Envelope 98 x 225 mm (3.9 x 8.9 in.) X
10 Envelope 105 x 241 mm (4.1 x 9.5 in.) X
DL Envelope 110 x 220 mm (4.3 x 8.7 in.) X
C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.01 in.) X
B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 in.) X
Other Envelope 98 x 162 mm (3.9 x 6.4 in.) to 176 x 250 mm(6.9 x 9.8 in.)		X

Supported paper types and weights

Paper type Staple finisher
Plain paper	✓
Card stock X
Transparencies X
Recycled	✓
Paper labels	✓
Bond	✓
Envelope	X
Rough envelope	X
Letterhead	✓
Preprinted	✓
Colored paper	✓
Light paper	✓
Heavy paper	✓
Rough/Cotton	✓
Custom Type [x]	✓

Printing

Printing forms and a document

Printing forms

Use the Forms and Favorites application to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that is regularly printed. Before you can use this application, first set it up on the printer. For more information, see “Setting up Forms and Favorites” on page 23.

1 From the printer home screen, navigate to:

Forms and Favorites > select the form from the list > enter the number of copies > adjust other settings

2 Depending on your printer model, touch 📄, √, or Submit.

Printing a document

1 From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded.
2 Send the print job:

For Windows users

a With a document open, click File > Print.
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
c Adjust the settings, if necessary.
d Click OK > Print.

For Macintosh users

a Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog:

1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded.

3 Click OK.

b Customize the settings in the Print dialog:

1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the Print dialog and pop-up menus, adjust the settings if necessary.

Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded, or select the appropriate tray or feeder.

3 Click Print.

Adjusting toner darkness

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

- View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123. - If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.

3 Adjust the toner darkness, and then click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness

2 Adjust the setting, and then touch Submit.

Printing from a flash drive

Printing from a flash drive

Notes:

- Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer control panel.

- You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.

1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.

1m 2mm 3mm 4 5mm 6mm 1mm 8mm 9mm + 0mm - C + - 11 4

Notes:

- A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted. - If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the printer ignores the flash drive.

- If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears on the printer display. After these print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, any connector, the memory device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device. Loss of data can occur.

Diagram showing a printer with a no-smoking symbol and a warning sign, indicating a hazard or prohibition of the device.

2 From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.

3 Touch the arrows to get a preview of the document.

4 Use + or - to specify the number of copies to be printed, and then touch Print.

Notes:

- Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.

- If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then touch Held Jobs on the home screen to print files from the flash drive.

Supported flash drives and file types

Notes:

• High-speed USB flash drives must support the full-speed standard. Low-speed USB devices are not supported.

- USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted with New Technology File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.

Recommended flash drives File type
Lexar JumpDrive FireFly (512MB and 1GB)SanDisk Cruzer Micro (512MB and 1GB)Sony Micro Vault Classic (512MB and 1GB)	Documents:pdfxpsImages:dcxgifjpeg or .jpgbmppcx.tiff or .tif.pngfls

Printing confidential and other held jobs

Storing print jobs in the printer

1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Security > Confidential Print > select the print job type

Use To
Max Invalid PIN Limit the number of times	es an invalid PIN can be entered.Note:When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration Hold print jobs	bs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel.Note:The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the numbers 1–9.
Repeat Job Expiration Print and store print jobs in the printer memory.
Verify Job Expiration Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies. It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is automatically deleted from the printer memory when all copies are printed.
Reserve Job Expiration Store print jobs for printing at a later time.Note:The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.
Notes:Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs.You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control panel.All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are calledheld jobs.

2 Touch Submit.

Printing confidential and other held jobs

Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve jobs are held in the printer until you delete them.

For Windows users

1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Click Print and Hold.
4 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential print job, also enter a four-digit PIN.
5 Click OK or Print.
6 From the printer home screen, release the print job.

- For confidential print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print

- For other print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print

For Macintosh users

1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the print options or Copies & Pages pop-up menu, choose Job Routing.
3 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential print job, also enter a four-digit PIN.
4 Click OK or Print.
5 From the printer home screen, release the print job.

- For confidential print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print

•For other print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print

Modifying confidential print settings

Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

- View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

- If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Configuration > Other Settings tab > Security > Confidential Print Setup.

3 Modify the settings:

• Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds that number, all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
• Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within that time, all of the jobs for that user are deleted.

4 Save the modified settings.

Printing information pages

Printing a font sample list

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Reports > Print Fonts

2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.

Printing a directory list

A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk.

From the home screen, navigate to:

Reports > Print Directory

Canceling a print job

Canceling a print job from the printer control panel

1 From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press ✗ on the keypad.
2 Touch the print job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.

Canceling a print job from the computer

For Windows users

1 Open the printers folder.

In Windows 8

From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:

Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.

2 Double-click the printer icon.

3 Select the print job you want to cancel.

4 Click Delete.

For Macintosh users

1 From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
- System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Open Print Queue
- System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Open Print Queue
2 From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.

Copying

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

Illustration of a printer with ABC chip and red arrow indicating compression (no text or symbols on device)

Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.

3D rendering of an open printer with a paper airplane being inserted (no visible text or symbols)

Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

Making copies

Making a quick copy

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
  •The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure the size of the original document and the size of the copy paper are the same.

3 From the printer control panel, press

Copying using the ADF

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
  •The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 Adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It

Copying using the scanner glass

1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It

If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the next page.

3 Touch Finish the Job.

Copying photos

1 Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Content > Photo > √

3 From the Content Source menu, navigate to:

Photo/Film > √ > Copy It

Note: If you have more photos to copy, then place the next photo on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the next page.

4 Touch Finish the Job.

Copying on specialty media

Copying on transparencies

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >

3 Navigate to:

Copy to > select the tray that contains transparencies > Copy It

If there are no trays that contain transparencies, then navigate to:

Manual Feeder > √ > select the size of the transparencies > √ > Transparency > √

4 Load transparencies into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.

Copying on letterhead

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >

4 Navigate to:

Copy to > select the tray containing the letterhead > Copy It

5 If there are no trays that support letterhead, then navigate to:

Manual Feeder > select the size of the letterhead > Letterhead

6 Load the letterhead faceup, top edge first into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.

Customizing copy settings

Copying to a different size

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >

4 Navigate to:

Copy to > select a new size for the copy > √ > Copy It

Making copies using paper from a selected tray

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >

4 Navigate to:

Copy to > select the tray containing the paper type you want to use >

5 Touch Copy It.

Copying different paper sizes

Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the "Copy to" and "Copy from" settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled to fit a single paper size (Example 2).

Example 1: Copying on mixed paper sizes

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes > √

4 Navigate to:

Copy to > Auto Size Match > √ > Copy It

The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.

Example 2: Copying on a single paper size

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

- Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

- The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes > √

4 Navigate to:

Copy to > Letter > √ > Copy It

The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on the paper size selected.

Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Sides (Duplex) > select the preferred duplexing method

Note: For the preferred duplexing method, the first number represents sides of the original documents while the second number represents sides of the copy. For example, select "2 sided to 2 sided" if you have two-sided original documents and you want two-sided copies.

4 Touch √ > Copy It.

Reducing or enlarging copies

Copies can be scaled from 25% to 400% of the original document size.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, touch Copy.

4 From the Scale area, touch - or + to decrease or increase the value by 1%.

Touching "Copy to" or "Copy from" after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.

Note: Auto is the factory default setting. This automatically adjusts the scan image of the original document to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.

5 Touch Copy It.

Adjusting copy quality

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Content

4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying.

• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business-type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.

5 Touch

6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying.

• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
- Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
- Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
- Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
- Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
- Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from a film.
- Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
- Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

7 Touch √ > Copy It.

Collating copies

If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print the copies as a set (collated) or to print the copies as groups of pages (not collated).

Collated Not collated

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

- Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass. - The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > select the preferred order of pages > √ > Copy It

Placing separator sheets between copies

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

- Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass. - The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Advanced Options > Separator Sheets

Note: Set Collate to "1,2,3 - 1,2,3" to place separator sheets between copies. If Collate is set to "1,1,1 - 2,2,2," then the separator sheets are added to the end of the copy job. For more information, see "Collating copies" on page 96.

4 Select one of the following:

- Between Copies - Between Jobs - Between Pages - Off

5 Touch √ > Copy It.

Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet

In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple-page document onto a single sheet of paper.

Notes:

• Make sure to set the paper size to letter, legal, A4, or JIS B5.
  •Make sure to set the copy size to 100%.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Advanced Options > Paper Saver > select the output you want > √ > Copy It

Note: If Paper Saver is set to Off, then the Print Page Borders option is unavailable.

Creating a custom copy job

The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each set may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the scanner scans the first set of original documents using the specified settings, and then it scans the next set with the same or different settings.

The definition of a set depends on the scan source:

• If you scan a document on the scanner glass, then a set consists of one page.
• If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF tray becomes empty.
• If you scan one page using the ADF, then a set consists of one page.

For example:

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
  •The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Advanced Options > Custom Job > On > ✅️ > Copy It

Note: When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.

4 Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan from automatic feeder or Scan from flatbed.

Note: Change the scan job settings, if necessary.

5 If you have another document to scan, then repeat the previous step. Otherwise, touch Finish the job.

Placing information on copies

Placing a header or footer on pages

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Advanced Options > Header/Footer > select where you want to place the header or footer > select the type of header or footer you want

4 Enter the required information depending on the header or footer you selected, and then touch Done.

5 Touch, and then press.

Placing an overlay message on each page

An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, Custom, and Draft.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Advanced Options > Overlay > select overlay message > Done > Copy It

Canceling a copy job

Canceling a copy job while the original document is in the ADF

When the ADF begins processing a document, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel.

Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass

From the home screen, touch Cancel Job.

Canceling appears on the display. When the job is canceled, the Copy screen appears.

Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed

1 From the home screen, touch Cancel Job, or press ✗ on the keypad.
2 Touch the job you want to cancel.
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.

Understanding the copy options

Copy from

This option opens a screen where you can select the paper size of the original document.

• Touch the paper size that matches the original document.
• To copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width, touch Mixed Sizes.
• To set the printer to automatically detect the size of the original document, touch Auto Size Sense.

Copy to

This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed.

• Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded.
• If the settings for "Copy from" and "Copy to" are different, then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting to accommodate the difference.
• If the paper type or size that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, then touch Manual Feeder, and manually load the paper in the multipurpose feeder.
• When "Copy to" is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the paper size of the original document. If a matching paper size is not in one of the trays, then Paper size not found appears and prompts to load a paper in a tray or multipurpose feeder.

Scale

This option lets you scale the document from 25% to 400% of the original document size. You can also set automatic scaling.

- When copying to a different paper size, such as from legal-size to letter-size paper, set the "Copy from" and "Copy to" paper sizes automatically to scale the scan image to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.

- To decrease or increase the value by 1%, touch — or + on the printer control panel. To make a continuous decrease or increase in value, hold the button for two seconds or more.

Darkness

This option lets you adjust how light or dark the copies are in relation to the original document.

Sides (Duplex)

This option lets you make one- or two-sided copies from one- or two-sided original documents.

Collate

This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document.

Copies

This option lets you set the number of copies to be printed.

Content

This option lets you set the original document type and source.

Select from the following content types:

• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business-type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.

Select from the following content sources:

• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
- Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
- Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
•Brochure—The original document is from a brochure.
- Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
- Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
- Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
- Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

Save As Shortcut

This option lets you save the current settings by assigning a shortcut number.

Using the advanced options

Select from the following settings:

• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Sharpness settings before you scan the document.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
  • Fix Scan Skew—This straightens scanned images that are slightly skewed when received from the ADF tray.

Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.

E-mailing

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

Illustration of a printer with ABC chip and red arrow indicating compression (no text or symbols on device)

Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.

3D rendering of an open printer with a paper airplane being inserted (no visible text or symbols)

Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

You can use the printer to e-mail scanned documents to one or more recipients. There are three ways to send an e-mail from the printer. You can type the e-mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book.

Setting up the printer to e-mail

Setting up the e-mail function

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3 Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.

Configuring e-mail settings

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.

3 Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.

Creating an e-mail shortcut

Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings.

3 From the Other Settings column, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.
4 Type a unique name for the e-mail recipient, and then type the e-mail address. If you are entering multiple addresses, then separate each address with a comma.
5 Click Add.

Creating an e-mail shortcut using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

E-mail > Recipient > type an e-mail address

To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient's e-mail address.

2 Touch Subject, then type the e-mail subject, and then touch Done.
3 Touch Message, then type your message, and then touch Done.
4 Adjust the e-mail settings.

Note: If you change the settings after the e-mail shortcut has been created, then the settings are not saved.

5 Touch

6 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
7 Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.

If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.

Notes:

• The shortcut name appears in the E-mail Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
• You can use the shortcut when e-mailing another document using the same settings.

E-mailing a document

You can use the printer to e-mail scanned documents to one or more recipients in a number of ways. You can type the e-mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send or MyShortcut application from the printer home screen. For more information, see the "Activating the home screen applications" section of the User's Guide.

Sending an e-mail using the printer control panel

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure that the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

E-mail > Recipient(s)

4 Type the e-mail address, or press # using the keypad, and then enter the shortcut number.

Notes:

• To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add.
• You can also enter an e-mail address using the address book.

5 Touch Done > Send It.

Sending an e-mail using a shortcut number

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 Press #, then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then touch √.

Note: To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number that you want to add.

4 Touch Send It.

Sending an e-mail using the address book

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the name of the recipient > Search

4 Touch the name of the recipient.

Note: To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number that you want to add, or search the address book.

5 Touch Done.

Customizing e-mail settings

Adding e-mail subject and message information

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e-mail address > Done

4 Touch Subject, then type the e-mail subject, and then touch Done.

5 Touch Message, then type your message, and then touch Done.

Changing the output file type

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e-mail address > Done > Send as

4 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send.

- PDF—Create a single file with multiple pages.

• Secure PDF—Create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
• TIFF—Create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs.
• XPS—Create a single XML Paper Specification (XPS) file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third-party standalone viewer.

5 Touch √ > Send It.

Note: If you selected Secure PDF, then you will be prompted to enter your password twice.

Canceling an e-mail

• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears, or while Scan the Next Page / Finish the Job appears.

Understanding the e-mail options

Recipient(s)

This option lets you enter the recipient of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e-mail addresses.

Subject

This option lets you type a subject line for your e-mail.

Message

This option lets you type a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.

File Name

This option lets you customize the attachment file name.

Original Size

This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to e-mail. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter- and legal-size pages).

Darkness

This option lets you adjust how light or dark your scanned documents are in relation to the original document.

Resolution

This option lets you adjust the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.

Send As

This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.

Select one of the following:

• PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages.
  Note: PDF is the factory default setting.
• Secure PDF—Use this to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
• TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document.
• XPS—Use this to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.

Content

This option lets you set the original document type and source.

Select from the following content types:

• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business-type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.

Select from the following content sources:

• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
- Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
- Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
- Brochure—The original document is from a brochure.
- Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
- Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
- Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
- Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

Page Setup

This option lets you change the following settings:

• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper. This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.

Scan Preview

This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.

Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.

Using the advanced options

Select from the following settings:

• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Sharpness settings before you e-mail the document.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Fix Scan Skew—This straightens scanned images that are slightly skewed when received from the ADF tray.

Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.

Faxing

Note: Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models.

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

ABC

Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.

3D rendering of an open printer with a paper airplane being inserted (no visible text or symbols)

Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

Setting up the printer to fax

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.

Note: The following connection methods are applicable only in select countries or regions.

During the initial printer setup, clear the Fax function and any other function you plan to set up later, and then press Continue.

Note: The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax.

Photo showing a printer with a no-smoking symbol and a close-up of the printer's device, indicating no smoking or anti-smoking.

Initial fax setup

Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom

Choosing a fax connection

Scenario 1: Standard telephone line

Setup 1: Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line

Diagram showing connection between a printer and a device with labeled wiring, highlighting internal components like USB cable and connection points.

To connect:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.

Tips for this setup:

• You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On) or manually (Auto Answer Off).
• If you want to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), then set the printer to pick up on any number of rings that you want.

Setup 2: Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine

Connected to the same telephone wall jack

Diagram showing connection between a server, printer, and network device with labeled ports and connections

To connect:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3 Connect the answering machine to the 📊 port of the printer.

Connected to different wall jacks

Diagram showing connection between a computer device and its wiring, with labeled components and wiring details.

To connect:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.

Tips for this setup:

• If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On).
• Set the printer to pick up calls two rings after the answering machine. For example, if the answering machine picks up calls after four rings, then set the printer to pick up after six rings. This way, the answering machine picks up calls first and your voice calls are received. If the call is a fax, then the printer detects the fax signal on the line and takes over the call.
• If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service provided by your telephone company, then make sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive faxes automatically.

Setup 3: Printer is sharing the line with a telephone subscribed to voice mail service

Diagram illustrating connection between a client, telephone, printer, and external devices with labeled ports and data points

To connect:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3 Connect the telephone to the port of the printer.

Tips for this setup:

• This setup works best if you subscribe to a distinctive ring service. If you have distinctive ring service, then make sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive faxes automatically.
• If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes manually (Auto Answer Off).

When you answer the telephone and you hear fax tones, press *9* or the manual answer code on the telephone to receive the fax.

- You can also set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), but you need to turn off the voice mail service when you are expecting a fax. This setting works best if you are using voice mail more often than fax.

Scenario 2: Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)

Diagram illustrating network connection between a desktop computer and a router, showing connections via phone, keyboard, and Ethernet ports.

A Digital Subscriber Line splits your regular telephone line into two channels: voice and Internet. Telephone and fax signals travel through the voice channel, and Internet signals pass through the other channel. This way, you can use the same line for analog voice calls (including faxes) and digital Internet access.

To minimize interference between the two channels and ensure a quality connection, you need to install a DSL filter for the analog devices (fax machine, telephone, answering machine) in your network. Interference causes noise and static on the telephone, failed and poor quality faxes for the printer, and slow Internet connection on your computer.

To install a filter for the printer:

1 Connect the line port of the DSL filter to the wall jack.
2 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer. Connect the other end to the phone port on the DSL filter.
3 To continue using a computer for Internet access, connect the computer to the DSL HPN port on the DSL filter.
4 To connect a telephone to the printer, remove any installed adapter plug from the 📞 port of the printer, and then connect the telephone to the port.

Scenario 3: VoIP telephone service

Diagram showing connections between a computer tower, connected to an ATM device via cable and network interface, with labeled ports and connection points.

To connect:

1 Connect one end of a telephone cable to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the VoIP adapter.

The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. You may need to pay extra to your VoIP provider if you want to activate the second phone port.

3 Remove the protective plug from the port of the printer, and then connect the telephone to the port.

Tips for this setup:

• To make sure that the phone port on the VoIP adapter is active, plug an analog telephone into the phone port, and then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.
• If you need two phone ports for your devices but do not want to pay extra, then do not plug the printer into the second phone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the Phone Line 1 or Phone Port, and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.

Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct splitter, plug an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.

Scenario 4: Digital telephone service through a cable provider

Setup 1: Printer is connected directly to a cable modem

Diagram showing network connection between a server, client, and router with labeled ports and connections

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the cable modem.

Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge additional cost for activation of the second phone port.

3 Connect your analog telephone phone to the port of the printer.

Notes:

• To make sure that the telephone port on the cable modem is active, plug an analog telephone into the telephone port, and then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.
• If you need two telephone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay additional cost, then do not plug the printer into the second telephone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the Phone Line 1 or Phone Port, and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.
• Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct splitter, plug an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.

Setup 2: Printer is connected to a wall jack; cable modem is installed elsewhere in the facility

Diagram illustrating network connection between a computer and a folder, showing cable routing, device placement, and connection points.

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3 Connect your analog telephone to the 📞 port of the printer.

Scenario 5: Countries or regions with different telephone wall jacks and plugs

Some countries or regions may have different types of telephone wall jack connectors than those that came with the printer. The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ-11. Your printer comes with the RJ-11 jack and a telephone cable with the RJ-11 plug.

If the wall jack or equipment in your facility is not compatible with this type of connection, then you need to use a telephone adapter. An adapter for your country or region may not come with your printer, and you may need to purchase it separately.

There may be an adapter plug installed in the 📋 port of the printer. If you are using a telephone adapter or a facility that has a cascaded or serial wiring scheme, then do not remove the adapter plug from the 📋 port of the printer.

Line drawing of a 3D electrical connector or socket (no text or symbols)

Part name Part number
Lexmark adapter plug 40X8519

Connecting the printer to a non-RJ-11 wall jack

Diagram illustrating network connection between a printer and a mobile phone, showing cable routing and connection points with red arrows indicating connections.

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ-11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to the wall jack.
3 If you want to connect another device (telephone or answering machine) to the same wall jack, and if the device has a non-RJ-11 connector, then connect it directly to the telephone adapter.

Notes:

• The 📋 port of the printer may have an adapter plug for use with the adapter. Do not remove the plug from the 📋 port of the printer.
  • In some countries or regions, the printer may not come with a telephone adapter or an adapter plug.

Connecting the printer to a wall jack in Germany

The German wall jack has two kinds of ports. The N ports are for fax machines, modems, and answering machines. The F port is for telephones.

N F N

Connect the printer to any of the N ports.

Diagram showing connection between a computer server, cable, and network device with labeled ports and wiring connections

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the RJ-11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to an N port.

3 If you want to connect a telephone and answering machine to the same wall jack, then connect the devices as shown.

Note: Do not remove the adapter plug from the 📞 port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded telephone system.

Connecting to a distinctive ring service

A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone company. This service lets you have multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a different ring pattern. This may be useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port ☐.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.

Close-up of a printer's cable being inserted into a socket, showing internal components and wiring (no text or symbols visible)

3 Change the distinctive rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer.

Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This sets the printer to answer single, double, and triple ring patterns.

a From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Answer On

b Select the pattern setting you want to change, and then touch √.

Setting the outgoing fax name and number

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.

3 In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4 In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.

Setting the date and time

You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.

3 In the Manually Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.

4 Click Submit.

Note: It is recommended to use the network time.

Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time

The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.

3 Select the Automatically Observe DST check box, and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time Zone Setup section.

4 Click Submit.

Sending a fax

You can use the printer to send a fax to one or more recipients in a number of ways. You can type the e-mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send or MyShortcut application from the printer home screen. For more information, see the "Activating the home screen applications" section of the User's Guide.

Sending a fax using the printer control panel

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

- Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

- The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut.

Note: To add recipients, touch Next number, and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut number, or search the address book.

5 Touch Fax It.

Sending a fax using the computer

The printer driver fax option lets you send a print job to the printer, which sends the job as a fax. The fax option works as a normal fax machine, but is controlled through the printer driver instead of the printer control panel.

1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.

3 Navigate to:

Fax tab > Enable fax

4 Enter the recipient fax number or numbers in the "Fax number(s)" field.

Note: Fax numbers can be entered manually or by using the Phone Book feature

5 If necessary, enter a prefix in the "Dialing prefix" field.
6 Select the appropriate paper size and page orientation.
7 If you want to include a cover page with the fax, then select Include cover page with fax, and then enter the appropriate information.
8 Click OK.

Notes:

• The Fax option is available for use only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For information on installing these drivers, see the Software and Documentation CD.
• The Fax option must be configured and enabled in the PostScript driver under the Configuration tab before it can be used.
• If the Always display settings prior to faxing check box is selected, then you are prompted to verify the recipient information before the fax is sent. If this check box is cleared, then the queued document is sent automatically as a fax when you click OK on the Fax tab.

Sending a fax using a shortcut number

Fax shortcuts are like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or a fax machine. A shortcut number (1–999) can contain a single recipient or multiple recipients.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the printer control panel, press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.

4 Touch Fax It.

Sending a fax using the address book

The address book lets you search for bookmarks and network directory servers. For more information on enabling the address book feature, contact your system support person.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Fax > type the name of the recipient > Search

Note: You can search only for one name at a time.

4 Touch the name of the recipient, and then touch Fax It.

Sending a fax at a scheduled time

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Fax > enter the fax number > Delayed Send

Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, then the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for transmission are listed in the fax queue.

4 Specify the time the fax will be transmitted, and then touch √.

The time is increased or decreased in 30-minute increments.

5 Touch Fax It.

Note: The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.

Creating shortcuts

Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server

Assign a shortcut number to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.

Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support person.

3 Type a name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.

Notes:

• To create a multiple-number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
• Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).

4 Assign a shortcut number.

Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

5 Click Add.

Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.

Note: To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.

2 Touch

3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.

4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.

Note: If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.

Customizing fax settings

Changing the fax resolution

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Fax > enter the fax number > Options

4 From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to select the resolution you want.

Note: Select a resolution from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (best quality at a reduced speed).

5 Touch Fax It.

Making a fax lighter or darker

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Fax > enter the fax number > Options

4 Adjust the fax darkness, and then touch Fax It.

Viewing a fax log

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Reports.

3 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.

Blocking junk faxes

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.

Notes:

• This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or have no fax name.
• In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or type the fax names of specific fax callers you want to block.

Canceling an outgoing fax

Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning

• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears or while Scan the Next Page and Finish the Job appear.

Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory

1 On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.

The Cancel Jobs screen appears.

2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.

Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the job you want to cancel.

3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.

The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.

Holding and forwarding faxes

Holding faxes

This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.

3 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:

•Off
•Always On
•Manual
•Scheduled

4 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:

a Click Fax Holding Schedule.
b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.

5 Click Add.

Forwarding a fax

This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e-mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Fax Settings.
3 From the Fax Forwarding menu, select Print, Print and Forward, or Forward.
4 From the "Forward to" menu, select Fax, E-mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF.
5 In the "Forward to Shortcut" field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.

Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the "Forward to" menu.

6 Click Submit.

Understanding the fax options

Content

This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.

Select from the following content types:

• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business-type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.

Select from the following content sources:

• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
- Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.

•Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.

•Brochure—The original document is from a brochure.

• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

Resolution

This option lets you adjust the quality of the fax output. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.

Select one of the following:

• Standard—Use this when faxing most documents.
• Fine 200 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with small prints.
• Super fine 300 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with fine details.
• Ultra fine 600 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with pictures or photos.

Darkness

This option lets you adjust how light or dark the faxes are in relation to the original document.

Delayed Send

This option lets you send a fax at a later time or date.

Page Setup

This option lets you change the following settings:

• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on one side or on both sides of the page (duplex). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.

Scan Preview

This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.

Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.

Using the advanced options

Select from the following settings:

• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Sharpness settings before you fax the document.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Fix Scan Skew—This straightens scanned images that are slightly skewed when received from the ADF tray.

Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.

Scanning

You can use the printer to send a file to an FTP address. You can type the e-mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi-send or MyShortcut application from the printer home screen. For more information, see the "Activating the home screen applications" section of the User's Guide.

Using Scan to Network

Scan to Network lets you scan your documents to network destinations specified by your system support person. After the destinations (shared network folders) have been established on the network, the setup process for the application involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer using its Embedded Web Server. For more information, see “Setting up Scan to Network” on page 26.

Scanning to an FTP address

Creating shortcuts

Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to an FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for creating shortcut numbers: using the Embedded Web Server and using the printer control panel.

Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Navigate to:

Settings > Other Settings area > Manage Shortcuts > FTP Shortcut Setup

3 Enter the appropriate information.

Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support person.

4 Enter a shortcut number.

Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

5 Click Add.

Creating an FTP shortcut using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > [icon] > type a name for the shortcut > Done

2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.

Notes:

• If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
• If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

Scanning to an FTP address

Scanning to an FTP address using the printer control panel

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the printer control panel, navigate to:

FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > Done > Send It

Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the printer control panel, press # on the keypad, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.

4 Touch √ > Send It.

Scanning an FTP using the address book

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

- Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

FTP > FTP > [icon] > type the name of the recipient > Search

4 Touch the name of the recipient.

Note: To search for additional recipients, touch New Search, and then type the name of the next recipient.

5 Touch > Send It.

Scanning to a computer or flash drive

You can use the printer to send a scanned file. You can also use Scan to Network, Multisend, and MyShortcut applications from the printer home screen. For more information, see the "Activating the home screen applications" section of the User's Guide.

ADF Scanner glass

ABC

Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.

3D rendering of an open printer with a paper airplane being inserted (no visible text or symbols)

Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to be directly connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images. You can scan the document back to the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer.

Scanning to a computer using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Scan Profile > Create Scan Profile.

3 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.

4 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scan image.

5 Type a scan name, and then a user name.

Note: The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.

6 Click Submit.

Note: Clicking Submit automatically assigns a shortcut number. You can use this shortcut number when you are ready to scan your documents.

7 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.

a Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
  •The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

b If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

c Do either of the following:

• Press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
  •From the home screen, navigate to:
  Held Jobs > Profiles > select your shortcut on the list

Note: The scanner scans and sends the document to the directory you specified.

8 View the file from the computer.

Note: The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified.

Setting up Scan to Computer

Notes:

• This feature is supported only in Windows Vista or later.
• Make sure that your computer and printer are connected to the same network.

1 Open the printers folder.

In Windows 8

From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:

Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click 📄 or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.

2 Depending on your operating system, click Add devices and printers, Add a device, or Add a printer.

3 Select your printer from the list.

Note: To identify your printer, print a network setup page, and then look for "Fully Qualified Domain Name" in the TCP/IP section.

4 Click Next > Close.

5 Depending on your device, do either of the following:.

- Press and hold the printer you want to configure.

- Right-click the printer you want to configure.

6 From the menu that appears, select Scan Properties or Properties, and then change the settings as necessary.

7 From the printer control panel, touch Scan to Computer and then select from the following options:

- Scan—Scan and save the document directly to a selected location on the computer.

- Scan for Print—Scan and automatically print the document.

- Scan for E-mail—Attach a scanned document to an e-mail.

- Scan for Fax—Attach a scanned document to be sent through fax.

8 Touch Send It.

Remote scan in progress appears on the printer display. The scanned image opens automatically on the computer screen.

Scanning to a flash drive

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.

Note: The USB Drive home screen appears.

4 Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive.

Note: The printer goes back to the home screen after 30 seconds of inactivity.

5 Adjust the scan settings, and then touch Scan It.

Using the ScanBack Utility

You can use the Lexmark ScanBack™ Utility instead of the Embedded Web Server to create scan-to-computer profiles. The ScanBack Utility can be downloaded from the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

1 Set up your scan-to-computer profile:

a Launch the ScanBack Utility.
b Select the printer.

If no printers are listed, then contact your system support person, or click Setup to manually search for an IP address or host name.

c Follow the instructions on your computer screen to define the type of document being scanned and what kind of output you want to create.
d Assign a file name of your scan profile, and then specify a location on your computer.
e Click Finish.

A dialog box appears with your scan profile information and the status of the received images.

Note: You can select Create Shortcut to create a shortcut of the scan profile settings to your desktop.

2 Scan your original documents:

a Load all pages into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
b From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Held jobs > Profiles and Solutions > select your scan profile

Note: Your output file is saved in a directory or launched in the application you specified.

Understanding the scan options

FTP

This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.

Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

File Name

This option lets you type a file name for the scan image.

Save As Shortcut

This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a number.

Original Size

This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter- and legal-size pages).

Darkness

This option lets you adjust how light or dark the scanned documents are in relation to the original document.

Resolution

This option lets you adjust the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.

Send As

This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.

Select one of the following:

• PDF—Use to create a single file with multiple pages.
• Secure PDF—Use to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
• TIFF—Use to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Use to create and attach a separate file for each page of the original document.
• XPS—Use to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.

Content

This option lets you set the original document type and source.

Select from the following content types:

• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business-type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.

Select from the following content sources:

• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
- Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
- Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
- Brochure—The original document is from a brochure.
- Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
- Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
- Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
- Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

Page Setup

This option lets you change the following settings:

• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.

Scan Preview

This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.

Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.

Using the advanced options

Select from the following settings:

• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you scan the document.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Multifeed Sensor—This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then shows an error message.

Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.

Understanding the printer menus

• "Menus list" on page 139
  •“Paper menu” on page 140
  •“Reports Menu” on page 150
  •“Network/Ports menu” on page 151
• "Security menu" on page 160
• "Settings menu" on page 165
• "Help menu" on page 209

Menus list

Paper Menu Reports Network/Ports Security

Default Source	Menu Settings Page	Active NIC	Edit Security Settings
Paper Size/Type	Device Statistics	Standard Network ^2	Miscellaneous Security Settings
Configure MP	Stapler Test	Standard USB
Substitute Size	Network Setup Page ^1	Parallel [x]	Confidential Print Menu
Paper Texture	Network [x] Setup Page	Serial [x]	Disk Wiping
Paper Weight	Shortcut List	SMTP Setup	Security Audit Log
Paper Loading	Fax Job Log		Set Date and Time
Custom Types	Fax Call Log
Custom Names ^1	Copy Shortcuts
Custom Scan Sizes	E-mail Shortcuts
Universal Setup	Fax Shortcuts
	FTP Shortcuts
	Profiles List
	Print Fonts
	Print Directory
	Print Demo
	Asset Report
Settings Help Manage Shortcuts			Option Card Menu3
General Settings	Print All Guides	Fax Shortcuts	A list of installed DLEs (Download Emulators) appears.
Copy Settings	Copy Guide	E-mail Shortcuts
Fax Settings	E-mail Guide	FTP Shortcuts
E-mail Settings	Fax Guide	Copy Shortcuts
FTP Settings	FTP Guide	Profile Shortcuts
Flash Drive Menu	Print Defects Guide
Print Settings	Information Guide
	Supplies Guide

^1 Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Network Setup Page or Network [x] Setup Page.

^2 Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Standard Network or Network [x].

^3 This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.

Paper menu

Default Source menu

Use To

Default SourceTray [x]MP FeederManual PaperManual Envelope

Set a default paper source for all print jobs.Notes:Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” for MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the paper size and paper type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.

Paper Size/Type menu

Use To
Tray [x] SizeA4A5A6JIS B5LetterLegalExecutiveOficio (Mexico)FolioStatementUniversal	Specify the size of the paper loaded in each tray.Notes:Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.If the same size and type of paper are loaded in two trays and the tray settings for paper size and type match, then the trays are automatically linked. The multipurpose feeder may also be linked. When one tray is empty, the job prints using paper from the linked tray.A6 is supported only in Tray 1 and in the multipurpose feeder.
Tray [x] TypePlain PaperTransparencyRecycledLabelsBondLetterheadPreprintedColored PaperLight PaperHeavy PaperRough/CottonCustom Type [x]	Specify the type of the paper loaded in each tray.Notes:Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is the factory default setting for all other trays.If available, a user-defined name will appear instead of Custom Type [x].Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
MP Feeder SizeA4A5A6JIS B5LetterLegalExecutiveOficio (Mexico)FolioStatementUniversal7 3/4 Envelope9 Envelope10 EnvelopeDL EnvelopeC5 EnvelopeB5 EnvelopeOther Envelope	Specify the size of the paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder.Notes:Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” for MP Feeder Size to appear as a menu item.The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size. The paper size value must be set.
MP Feeder TypePlain PaperCard StockTransparencyRecycledLabelsBondEnvelopeRough EnvelopeLetterheadPreprintedColored PaperLight PaperHeavy PaperRough/CottonCustom Type [x]	Specify the type of the paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder.Notes:Plain Paper is the factory default setting.From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” in order for MP Feeder Type to appear as a menu item.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Manual Paper SizeA4A5A6JIS B5LetterLegalExecutiveOficio (Mexico)FolioStatementUniversal	Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.Note:Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
Manual Paper TypePlain PaperCard StockTransparencyRecycledLabelsBondLetterheadPreprintedColored PaperLight PaperHeavy PaperRough/CottonCustom Type [x]	Specify the type of the paper being manually loaded.Notes:Plain Paper is the factory default setting.From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Manual” in order for Manual Paper Type to appear as a menu item.
Manual Envelope Size7 3/4 Envelope9 Envelope10 EnvelopeDL EnvelopeC5 EnvelopeB5 EnvelopeOther Envelope	Specify the size of the envelope being manually loaded.Note:10 Envelope is the U.S. factory default setting. DL Envelope is the international factory default setting.
Manual Envelope TypeEnvelopeRough EnvelopeCustom Type [x]	Specify the type of the envelope being manually loaded.Note:Envelope is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.

Configure MP menu

Use To
Configure MPCassetteManualFirst	Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder.Notes:Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual-feed print jobs.First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source.

Substitute Size menu

Use To
Substitute SizeOffStatement/A5Letter/A4All Listed	Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available.Notes:All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are allowed.Off indicates no size substitutions are allowed.Setting a substitution lets the job print without a Change Paper message appearing.

Paper Texture menu

Use To
Plain TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded.Notes:Normal is the factory default setting.The options appear only if card stock is supported.
Transparency TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded.Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Envelope TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough Envelope TextureRough	Specify the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded.
Letterhead TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Heavy TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough/Cotton TextureRough	Specify the relative texture of the cotton paper loaded.
Custom [x] TextureSmoothNormalRough	Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded.Notes:Normal is the factory default setting.The options appear only if the custom type is supported.

Paper Weight menu

Use To
Plain WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Transparency WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Envelope WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough Envelope WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Letterhead WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light WeightLight	Specify that the relative weight of the paper loaded is light.
Heavy WeightHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the paper loaded is heavy.
Rough/Cotton WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the cotton or rough paper loaded.Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Custom [x] WeightLightNormalHeavy	Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded.Notes:Normal is the factory default setting.The options appear only when the custom type is supported.

Paper Loading menu

Use To
Card Stock LoadingDuplexOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Card Stock as the paper type.
Recycled LoadingDuplexOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Recycled as the paper type.
Labels LoadingDuplexOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Labels as the paper type.
Bond LoadingDuplexOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Bond as the paper type.
Letterhead LoadingDuplexOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Letterhead as the paper type.
Notes:Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.Duplex sets the printer default to two-sided printing for every print job unless one-sided printing is selected from Print Preferences in Windows or the Print dialog in Macintosh.
Preprinted LoadingDuplexOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Preprinted as the paper type.
Colored LoadingDuplexOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Colored as the paper type.
Light LoadingDuplexOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Light as the paper type.
Heavy LoadingDuplexOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Heavy as the paper type.
Rough/Cotton LoadingDuplexOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Rough or Cotton as the paper type.
Custom [x] LoadingDuplexOff	Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify Custom [x] as the paper type.Note:Custom [x] Loading appears only when the custom type is supported.
Notes:Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.Duplex sets the printer default to two-sided printing for every print job unless one-sided printing is selected from Print Preferences in Windows or the Print dialog in Macintosh.

Custom Types menu

Use To
Custom Type [x]PaperCard StockTransparencyRough/CottonLabelsEnvelope	Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory default custom type name or a user-defined custom name created from the Embedded Web Server or from MarkVisionTM Professional.
Notes:•Paper is the factory default setting.• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder to print from that source.
RecycledPaperCard StockTransparencyRough/CottonLabelsEnvelope	Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected in other menus.
Notes:•Paper is the factory default setting.• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder to print from that source.

Custom Names menu

Use To
Custom Name [x]	Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces Custom Type [x] in the printer menus.

Custom Scan Sizes menu

Use To

Custom Scan Size [x]Scan Size NameWidthHeightOrientationPortraitLandscape2 scans per sideOffOn

Specify a custom scan size name and page orientation.Notes:The custom scan size name replaces Custom Scan Size [x] in the printer menus.ADF Media Type is the factory default setting for custom scan sizes 3, 4, 5, and 6.8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Width. 210 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Width.14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Height. 297 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Height.Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.Off is the factory default setting for “2 scans per side.”

Universal Setup menu

Use To
Units of MeasureInchesMillimeters	Identify the units of measure.Notes:Inches is the US factory default setting.Millimeters is the international factory default setting.
Portrait Width3–8.5 inches76–216 mm	Set the portrait width.Notes:If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the maximum width allowed.8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. You can increase the width in 0.01-inch increments.216 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase the width in 1-mm increments.
Portrait Height3–14.17 inches76–360 mm	Set the portrait height.Notes:If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the maximum height allowed.14 inches is the US factory default setting. You can increase the height in 0.01-inch increments.356 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase the height in 1-mm increments.
Feed DirectionShort EdgeLong Edge	Specify the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction.Notes:Short Edge is the factory default setting.Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter than the maximum width supported in the tray.

Reports Menu

Reports menu

Use To
Menu Settings Page	Print a report containing information about the paper loaded in trays, installed memory, total page count, alarm settings, timeouts, printer control panel language, TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network connection, and other information.
Device Statistics	Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and number of printed pages.
Network Setup Page	Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address information.Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or in printers connected to print servers.
Network [x] Setup Page	Print a report containing information about the network settings of the printer, such as the TCP/IP address information.Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers, and when there is more than one network option installed.
Shortcut List Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts.
Fax Job Log Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes.Note: This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax Settings menu.
Fax Call Log	Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received, and blocked calls.Note: This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax Settings menu.
Copy Shortcuts Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts.
E-mail Shortcuts	Print a report containing information about e-mail shortcuts.
Fax Shortcuts Print a report containing information about fax shortcuts.
FTP Shortcuts Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts.
Profiles List Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.
Print Fonts	Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in the printer.
Print Directory	Print a list of all the resources stored in an optional flash memory card or printer hard disk.Notes:Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is working and installed correctly.
Asset Report	Print a report containing asset information including the printer serial number and model name. The report contains text and UPC bar codes that can be scanned into an asset database.

Network/Ports menu

Active NIC menu

Use To
Active NICAuto[list of available network cards]	Notes:•Auto is the factory default setting.•This menu item appears only when an optional network card is installed.

Standard Network or Network [x] menu

Note: Only active ports appear in this menu. All inactive ports are omitted.

Use To
PCL SmartSwitchOnOff	Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.Notes:On is the factory default setting.If PCL SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.
PS SmartSwitchOnOff	Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.Notes:On is the factory default setting.If PS SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming data and uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.
NPA ModeOffAuto	Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.Notes:Auto is the factory default setting.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Network BufferAuto3KB to [maximum size allowed]	Set the size of the network input buffer.Notes:Auto is the factory default setting.The value can be changed in 1KB increments.The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off.To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.Changing this setting from the printer control panel, and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PSOnOffAuto	Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.Notes:Auto is the factory default setting.Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Standard Network Setup or Network [x] SetupReportsNetwork CardTCP/IPIPv6WirelessAppleTalk	Display and set the printer network settings.Note:The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network.

Reports menu

To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports

Use To
Print Setup Page	Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address.

Network Card menu

To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card

Use To
View Card StatusConnectedDisconnected	View the connection status of the network card.
View Card Speed View the speed of an active network card.
Network AddressUAA LAA	View the network addresses.
Job Timeout0–255 seconds	Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled.Notes:90 seconds is the factory default setting.A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.If a value of 1–9 is selected, then the setting is saved as 10.

TCP/IP menu

To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > TCP/IP
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP

Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.

Use To
Set Hostname Set the current TCP/IP host name.
IP Address View or change the current TCP/IP address.
Netmask View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.
Gateway View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.
Enable DHCPOnOff	Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable RARPOnOff	Specify the RARP address assignment setting.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Enable BOOTPOnOff	Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable AutoIPYesNo	Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable FTP/TFTPYesNo	Enable the built-in FTP server, which lets you send files to the printer using File Transfer Protocol.Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable HTTP ServerYesNo	Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the printer can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser.Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
WINS Server Address View or change the current WINS server address.
Enable DDNSYesNo	View or change the current DDNS setting.Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable mDNSYesNo	View or change the current mDNS setting.Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
DNS Server Address View or change the current DNS server address.
Backup DNS Server Address View or	change the backup DNS server addresses.
Backup DNS Server Address 2
Backup DNS Server Address 3
Enable HTTPSYesNo	View or change the current HTTPS setting.Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

IPv6 menu

To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > IPv6
- Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6

Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.

Use To
Enable IPv6OnOff	Enable IPv6 in the printer.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Auto ConfigurationOnOff	Specify whether or not the wireless network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router.Note: On is the factory default setting.
View Hostname Set the host name.	Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
View Address
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6OnOff	Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.Note: On is the factory default setting.

Wireless menu

Note: This menu is available only in printers connected to an Ethernet network and printers with a wireless network adapter attached.

To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Wireless
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless

Use To
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)Start Push Button MethodStart PIN Method	Establish a wireless network connection and enable network security.Notes:•Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless network when buttons on both the printer and the access point (wireless router) are pressed within a given period of time.•Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network when a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings of the access point.
Enable/Disable WPS Auto-detectionEnableDisable	Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.Note: Disable is the factory default setting.
Network ModeBSS TypeInfrastructureAd hoc	Specify the network mode.Notes:• Infrastructure is the factory default setting. This lets the printer access a network using an access point.• Ad hoc configures a wireless connection directly between the printer and a computer.
Compatibility802.11b/g802.11b/g/n	Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.Note: The 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.
Choose Network Select an available network for	the printer to use.
View Signal Quality View the quality of the wireless connection.
View Security Mode View the encryption method	for the wireless network.

AppleTalk menu

Note: This menu appears only in printer models that are connected to an Ethernet network or when an optional wireless network adapter is installed.

To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk

Use To
ActivateYesNo	Enable or disable AppleTalk support.Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
View Name Show the assigned AppleTalk name.	Note: The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
View Address Show the assigned AppleTalk address.	Note: The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Set Zone[list of zones available on the network]	Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.Note: The default zone for the network is the factory default setting.

Standard USB menu

Use To
PCL SmartSwitchOnOff	Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.Notes:On is the factory default setting.When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitchOnOff	Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.Notes:On is the factory default setting.When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA ModeOnOffAuto	Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.Notes:Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data, determine the format, and then process it appropriately.The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the printer control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
USB BufferDisabledAuto3K to [maximum size allowed]	Set the size of the USB input buffer.Notes:•Auto is the factory default setting.•Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.•The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off.•To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the printer control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Job BufferingOffOnAuto	Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing.Notes:•Off is the factory default setting.•On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.•Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port.•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PSOnOffAuto	Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.Notes:•Auto is the factory default setting.•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.•Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
ENA AddressYYY.YYY.YYY.YYY	Set the network address information for an external print server.Note:This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.
ENA NetmaskYYY.YYY.YYY.YYY	Set the netmask information for an external print server.Note:This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.
ENA GatewayYYY.YYY.YYY.YYY	Set the gateway information for an external print server.Note:This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.

SMTP Setup menu

Use To
Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.
Primary SMTP Gateway Port	Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout5-30	Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to send an e-mail.Note: 30 is the factory default setting.
Reply Address Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the printer.
Use SSLDisabledNegotiateRequired	Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the SMTP server.Notes:Disabled is the factory default setting.When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server determines if SSL will be used.
SMTP Server AuthenticationNo authentication requiredLogin/PlainCRAM-MD5Digest-MD5NTLMKerberos 5	Specify the type of user authentication required for scan to e-mail privileges.Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
Device-Initiated E-mailNoneUse Device SMTP Credentials	Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP server.Notes:None is the factory default setting for Device-Initiated E-mail and User-Initiated E-mail.“Device Userid” and “Device password” are used to log in to the SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.
User-Initiated E-mailNoneUse Device SMTP CredentialsUse Session User ID and PasswordUse Session E-mail address and PasswordPrompt user
Device Userid
Device password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain

Security menu

Edit Security Setups menu

Note: This menu appears only in select touch-screen printer models.

Use To
Edit Backup PasswordUse Backup Password•Off•OnPassword	Create a backup password.Notes:•Off is the factory default setting for “Use Backup Password.”•This menu appears only if a backup password exists.
Edit Building BlocksInternal AccountsNTLMSimple Kerberos SetupKerberos SetupActive DirectoryLDAPLDAP+GSSAPIPasswordPIN	Edit settings for Internal Accounts, NTLM, Simple Kerberos Setup, Kerberos Setup, Active Directory, LDAP, Password, and PIN.
Edit Security Templates[list of available templates]	Add or edit a security template.
Edit Access ControlsAdministrative MenusFunction AccessManagementSolutionsCancel jobs at the Device	Control access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access points.

Miscellaneous Security Settings menu

Use To
Login RestrictionsLogin failuresFailure time frameLockout timePanel Login TimeoutRemote Login Timeout	Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control panel before all users are locked out.Notes:“Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are locked out. Settings range from 1 to 10 attempts is the factory default setting.“Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.“Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the login failures limit. Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting. 1 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time.“Panel Login Timeout” specifies how long the printer remains idle on the Home screen before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1 to 900 seconds. 30 seconds is the factory default setting.“Remote Login Timeout” specifies how long a remote interface remains idle before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1 to 120 seconds. 10 minutes is the factory default setting.
Security Reset JumperAccess controls=“No Security”No EffectReset factory security defaults	Change the value of the security settings.Notes:Access controls=“No Security” retains all the security information that the user has defined. “No Security” is the factory default setting“No Effect” means the reset has no effect on the device’s security configuration.“Reset factory security defaults” deletes all security information that the user has defined, and assigns the factory default value to each setting in the Miscellaneous Security Settings section of both the panel and the Embedded Web Server.
LDAP Certificate VerificationDemandTryAllowNever	Allow the user to request a server certificate.Notes:“Demand” means a server certificate is requested. If a bad certificate is provided or if no certificate is provided, then the session is terminated immediately. “Demand” is the factory default setting.“Try” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then the session is terminated immediately.“Allow” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then it will be ignored, and then the session proceeds normally.“Never” means no server certificate is requested.
Minimum PIN Length1–16	Limit the digit length of the PIN.Note:4 is the is the factory default setting.

Confidential Print menu

Use To
Max Invalid PINOff2-10	Set a limit on the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.Notes:This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job ExpirationOff1 hour4 hours24 hours1 week	Set a limit on how long the printer stores confidential print jobs.Notes:If the “Confidential Job Expiration” setting is changed while confidential print jobs reside in the printer memory or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for those print jobs does not change to the new default value.If the printer is turned off, then all confidential jobs held in the printer memory are deleted.
Repeat Job ExpirationOff1 hour4 hours24 hours1 week	Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs.
Verify Job ExpirationOff1 hour4 hours24 hours1 week	Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification.
Reserve Job ExpirationOff1 hour4 hours24 hours1 week	Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Disk Wiping menu

Disk Wiping erases only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system. All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.

Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.

Use To
Wiping ModeAuto	Specify the mode for disk wiping.
Automatic MethodSingle passMultiple pass	Mark all disk space used by a previous print job. This method does not permit the file system to reuse this space until it has been cleared.Notes:“Single pass” is the factory default setting.Only automatic wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to turn off the printer for an extended amount of time.Highly confidential information should be wiped using only the Multiple pass method.

Security Audit Log menu

Use To
Export Log Let an authorized user export	port the audit log.Notes:To export the audit log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must be attached to the printer.The audit log can be downloaded from the Embedded Web Server and saved on a computer.
Delete LogYesNo	Specify whether or not audit logs are deleted.Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Configure LogEnable AuditYesNoEnable Remote SyslogNoYesRemote Syslog Facility0-23Severity of events to log0-7	Specify how and whether or not audit logs are created.Notes:Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and remote syslog. No is the factory default setting.Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No is the factory default setting.Remote Syslog Facility determines the value used to send logs to the remote syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting.If the security audit log is activated, then the severity value of each event is recorded. 4 is the factory default setting.

Set Date/Time menu

Use To
Current Date and Time View the current date and time settings for the printer.
Manually Set Date and Time Enter the date and time.Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS format.
Time Zone Select the time zone.	Note: GMT is the factory default setting.
Automatically Observe DSTOnOff	Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end times associated with the printer Time Zone setting.Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time associated with the Time Zone setting.
Custom Time Zone SetupDST Start WeekDST Start DayDST Start MonthDST Start TimeDST End WeekDST End DayDST End MonthDST End TimeDST Offset	Enable the user to set up the time zone.
Enable NTPOnOff	Enable Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a network.Note: On is the factory default setting.
NTP Server View the NTP server address.
Enable AuthenticationOnOff	Change the authentication setting to On or Off.Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Settings menu

General Settings menu

Use To
Display LanguageEnglishFrancaisDeutschItalianoEspanolDanskNorskNederlandsSvenskaPortugueseSuomiRussianPolskiGreekMagyarTurkceCeskySimplified ChineseTraditional ChineseKoreanJapanese	Set the language of the text appearing on the printer display.Note: Not all languages are available for all printers, and you may need to install special hardware for those languages to appear.
Eco-ModeOffEnergyEnergy/PaperPaper	Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.Notes:Off is the factory default setting. This resets the printer to its factory default settings.The Energy setting minimizes the power used by the printer. Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and specialty media.Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media needed for a print job. Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.
ADF Loaded BeepEnabledDisabled	Specify whether or not the ADF sounds a beep when paper is loaded.Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.
ADF Multi-feed SensorOnOff	Detect when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at once.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Quiet ModeOffOn	Reduce the amount of noise produced by the printer.Notes:Off is the factory default setting. This supports the performance specifications for your printer.On configures the printer to produce as little noise as possible. This is best suited for printing text and line art.For optimal printing of color-rich documents, set Quiet Mode to Off.Selecting Photo from the printer driver may disable Quiet Mode and provide better print quality and full-speed printing.
Run Initial setupYesNo	Set the printer to run the setup wizard.Notes:Yes is the factory default setting.After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the “Country select” screen, the default becomes No.
KeyboardKeyboard TypeEnglishFrancaisFrancais CanadienDeutschItalianoEspanolGreekDanskNorskNederlandsSvenskaSuomiPortugueseRussianPolskiSwiss GermanSwiss FrenchKoreanMagyarTurkceCeskySimplified ChineseTraditional ChineseJapaneseCustom Key [x]	Specify a language and custom key information for the printer keyboard. The additional tabs enable access to accent marks and symbols from the keyboard.
Paper SizesUSMetric	Specify the default system of measurement for paper sizes.Notes:US is the factory default setting.The initial setting is determined by your country or region selection in the initial setup wizard.Changing this also changes the default setting for each input source in the Paper Size/Type menu.
Scan to PC Port Range[port range]	Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers separated by a semicolon.Note: “9751:12000” is the factory default setting.
Displayed InformationLeft sideRight sideCustom Text [x]	Specify what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the home screen.For the Left side and Right side menus, select from the following options:NoneIP AddressHostnameContact NameLocationDate/Time mDNS/DDNS Service NameZero Configuration NameCustom Text [x]Model NameNotes:IP Address is the factory default setting for “Left side.”Date/Time is the factory default setting for “Right side.”
Displayed Information (continued)Black Toner	Customize the displayed information for Black Toner.Select from the following options:When to displayDo not displayDisplayMessage to displayDefaultAlternateDefault[text entry]Alternate[text entry]Notes:“Do not display” is the factory default setting for “When to display.”Default is the factory default setting for “Message to display.”
Displayed Information (continued)Paper JamLoad PaperService Errors	Customize the displayed information for Paper Jam, Load Paper, and Service Errors menus.Select from the following options:DisplayYesNoMessage to displayDefaultAlternateDefault[text entry]Alternate[text entry]Notes:No is the factory default setting for Display.Default is the factory default setting for “Message to display.”
Home screen customizationChange LanguageCopyCopy ShortcutsFaxFax ShortcutsE-mailE-mail ShortcutsFTPFTP ShortcutsSearch Held JobsHeld JobsUSB DriveProfiles and SolutionsBookmarksJobs by userForms and Favorites	Change the icons that appear on the home screen.For each icon, select from the following options:DisplayDo not displayNotes:·Display is the factory default setting for the Copy, Fax,E-mail, FTP, Search Held Jobs, Held Jobs, USB Drive, and Forms and Favorites menus.·“Do not display” is the factory default setting for the Change Language, Copy Shortcuts, Fax Shortcuts, E-mail Shortcuts, FTP Shortcuts, Profiles and Solutions, Bookmarks, and “Jobs by user” menus.
Date FormatMM-DD-YYYYDD-MM-YYYYYYYY-MM-DD	Format the printer date.Notes:·MM-DD-YYYY is the U.S. factory default setting.·DD-MM-YYYY is the international factory default setting.
Time Format12 hour A.M./P.M.24 hour clock	Format the printer time.Note: “12 hour A.M./P.M.” is the factory default setting.
Screen Brightness20–100	Specify the brightness of the printer control panel screen.Note: 100 is the factory default setting.
One Page CopyOffOn	Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Output LightingNormal/Standby ModeOffDimBright	Set the amount of light from the standard output bin.Notes:·Dim is the factory default setting if Eco-Mode is set to Energy or Energy/Paper.·Bright is the factory default setting if Eco-Mode is Off or set to Paper.
Error LightingOnOff	Determine if indicator lights blink when the printer encounters errors.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Audio FeedbackButton FeedbackOnOffVolume1-10	Set the audio volume for the buttons.Notes:On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.5 is the factory default setting for Volume.
Tactile Touchscreen FeedbackOnOff	Provide touch-screen sensation feedback.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Show BookmarksYesNo	Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area.Note: Yes is the factory default setting. When Yes is selected, bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area.
Allow Background RemovalOnOff	Specify whether image background removal is allowed in copy, fax, e-mail, FTP, or scan-to-USB jobs.Note: On is the factory default setting. The background of the image will be removed.
Allow Custom Job ScansOnOff	Scan multiple jobs to one file.Note: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, then the Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs.
Scanner Jam RecoveryJob levelPage level	Specify how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs in the ADF.Notes:Job level is the factory default setting.If Job level is selected, then the entire job must be rescanned if any pages jam.If Page level is selected, then rescan from the jammed page forward.
Web Page Refresh Rate30-300	Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server refreshes.Note: 120 is the factory default setting.
Contact Name Specify a contact name for the printer.	Note: The contact name will be stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Location Specify the location of the printer.	Note: The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server.
AlarmsAlarm ControlCartridge AlarmStaple Alarm	Set an alarm to sound when the printer requires user intervention.When activated, Alarm Control lets you set the number of times that the alarm sounds, while Cartridge Alarm lets you stop printing when a cartridge-low condition occurs.For each alarm type, select from the following options:OffSingleContinuousNotes:•Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control. This sounds three quick beeps.•Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm and Staple Alarm. This means no alarm will sound.•Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.
TimeoutsStandby ModeDisabled1-240	Specify the number of minutes of inactivity before the printer enters a lower power state.Note:15 is the factory default setting.
TimeoutsSleep ModeDisabled1-180	Set the amount of time in minutes the printer waits after a job is printed before it goes into a reduced power state.Notes:•30 is the factory default setting.•Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require longer warm-up times.•Select the lowest setting if the printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting or you notice lights flickering in the room.•Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use. Under most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to print with minimum warm-up time.
TimeoutsTimeoutDisabled1-3 hours6 hours1-3 days1-2 weeks1 month	Set the printer to operate at a low power state.Notes:•Disabled is the factory default setting in all countries except in European Union countries and Switzerland.•“3 days” is the factory default setting in European Union countries and Switzerland.
TimeoutsHibernate Timeout on ConnectionHibernateDo Not Hibernate	Set the printer to Hibernate Timeout even when there is an active Ethernet or phone connection.Note:Do Not Hibernate is the factory default setting.
TimeoutsScreen Timeout15–300	Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before returning the printer display to Ready state.Note: 30 is the factory default setting.
TimeoutsProlong Screen TimeoutOnOff	Show a message that lets you reset the screen timeout timer instead of returning to the home screen.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
TimeoutsPrint TimeoutDisabled1–255	Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an end-of-job message before canceling the remainder of the print job.Notes:90 is the factory default setting.When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any new print jobs are waiting.Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation. This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs.
TimeoutsWait TimeoutDisabled15–65535	Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional data before canceling a print job.Notes:40 is the factory default setting.Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL emulation print jobs.
TimeoutsJob Hold Timeout5–255	Set the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and continues to print other jobs in the print queue.Notes:30 is the factory default setting.This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Error RecoveryAuto RebootReboot when idleReboot alwaysReboot never	Automatically reboot the printer.Note: “Reboot when idle” is the factory default setting.
Error RecoveryMax Auto Reboots1–20	Determine the number of automatic reboots the printer can perform.Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Print RecoveryAuto ContinueDisabled5-255	Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when not resolved within the specified time period.Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Print RecoveryJam RecoveryOnOffAuto	Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.Notes:•Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks.•On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.•Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.
Print RecoveryJam AssistOnOff	Set the printer to automatically check for jammed paper.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Print RecoveryPage ProtectOffOn	Let the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed otherwise.Notes:•Off is the factory default setting. This prints a partial page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.•On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the entire page prints.
Press Sleep ButtonDo NothingSleepHibernate	Determine how the printer responds to a short press of the Sleep button when the printer is idle.Note: Sleep is the factory default setting.
Press and Hold Sleep ButtonDo NothingSleepHibernate	Determine how the printer responds to a long press of the Sleep button when the printer is idle.Notes:•Do Nothing is the factory default setting.•Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower power configuration.•If the printer is in Sleep Mode, then the touch screen appears off and the Sleep button turns amber in color.•Press and hold the Sleep button for 3 seconds or longer to enter Hibernate mode.•Touch anywhere on the touch screen or press a button on the printer control panel to exit Sleep Mode.
Factory DefaultsDo Not RestoreRestore Now	Return the printer settings to the factory default settings.Notes:Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. This keeps the user-defined settings.Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.

Copy Settings menu

Use To
Content TypeTextGraphicsText/PhotoPhoto	Specify the content of the original document.Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content SourceBlack/White LaserColor LaserInkjetPhoto/FilmMagazineNewspaperPressOther	Specify how the original document was produced.Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)1 sided to 1 sided1 sided to 2 sided2 sided to 1 sided2 sided to 2 sided	Specify whether an original document is two-sided (duplex) or one-sided, and then specify whether the copy should be two-sided or one-sided.Notes:1 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on one side and the copy will also have print on one side.1 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on one side, while the copy will have print on both sides.2 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on both sides, while the copy will have print on just one side.2 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on both sides, and the copy will also have print on both sides.
Paper SaverOff2-up Portrait4-up Portrait2-up Landscape4-up Landscape	Copy two or four sheets of a document on one page.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Print Page BordersOnOff	Specify whether or not a border is printed.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Collate1,1,1 - 2,2,21,2,3 - 1,2,3	Keep the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies.Note: “1,2,3 - 1,2,3” is the factory default setting.
Original SizeLetterLegalExecutiveFolioStatementOficio (Mexico)UniversalAuto Size SenseMixed SizesA4A5A6JIS B5Custom Scan Size [x]Book OriginalBusiness Card3 x 5 in.4 x 6 in.ID Card	Specify the paper size of the original document.Notes:Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.A4 is the international factory default setting.
Copy To SourceTray [x]Auto Size MatchManual Feeder	Specify the paper source for copy jobs.Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Transparency SeparatorsOnOff	Place a sheet of paper between transparencies.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Separator SheetsOffBetween CopiesBetween JobsBetween Pages	Place a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet SourceTray [x]	Specify the separator sheet source.Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Darkness1-9	Specify the level of darkness for the copy job.Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Number of Copies1-999	Specify the number of copies for the copy job.Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Header/Footer[Location]OffDate/TimePage numberCustom textPrint onAll pagesFirst page onlyAll but first pageCustom text	Specify the header or footer information and its location on the page.For the location, select from the following options:Top leftTop middleTop rightBottom leftBottom middleBottom rightNotes:Off is the factory default setting for the location."All pages" is the factory default setting for "Print on."
OverlayConfidentialCopyDraftUrgentCustomOff	Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Custom Overlay Specify the custom	overlay text.Note: A maximum of 64 characters is allowed.
Allow priority copiesOnOff	Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanningOnOff	Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single copy job.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Allow Save as ShortcutOnOff	Save custom copy settings as shortcuts.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal-4 to 4	Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Auto CenterOffOn	Automatically align the content at the center of the page.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Contrast0-5Best for content	Specify the contrast used for the copy job.Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Mirror ImageOffOn	Create a mirror image of the original document.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative ImageOffOn	Create a negative image of the original document.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail-4 to 4	Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy.Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Fix Scan SkewAutoOffOn	Correct slight skew in the scanned image.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edgeOffOn	Specify if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge prior to faxing.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness1-5	Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy.Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Sample CopyOffOn	Create a sample copy of the original document.Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Fax Settings menu

Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu

Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line.

General Fax Settings

Use To
Fax Name Specify the name of the fax in the printer.
Fax Number Specify the number assigned to the fax.
Fax IDFax NameFax Number	Specify how the fax is identified.
Enable Manual FaxOnOff	Set the printer to fax manually, which requires a line splitter and a telephone handset.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax number.Touch # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.
Memory UseAll receiveMostly receiveEqualMostly sendAll send	Define the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs.Notes:"Equal" is the factory default setting. This splits the memory for sending and receiving fax jobs into equal amounts."Mostly send" specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs."All send" specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs."All receive" specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs."Mostly receive" specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
Cancel FaxesAllowDon't Allow	Specify whether or not the printer cancels fax jobs.Note: Allow is the factory default setting.
Caller IDOffPrimaryAlternate	Specify the type of caller ID being used.
Fax number maskingOffFrom leftFrom right	Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.The number of characters masked is determined by the "Digits to mask" setting.
Digits to Mask0–58	Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Fax Cover Page	Configure the fax cover page.
Fax Cover Page	Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options.
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Include to Field
On
Off
Include from Field
On
Off
From
Include Message Field
On
Off
Message
Include Logo
On
Off
Include Footer [x]
On
Off
Footer [x]

Fax Send Settings

Use To
ResolutionStandardFine 200 dpiSuper Fine 300 dpiUltra Fine 600 dpi	Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives better print quality, but increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Original SizeLetterLegalExecutiveFolioStatementOficio (Mexico)UniversalAuto Size SenseMixed SizesA4A5A6JIS B5Custom Scan Size [x]Book OriginalBusiness Card3 x 5 in.4 x 6 in.	Specify the paper size of the original document.Note: Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)OffLong edgeShort edge	Specify how text and graphics are oriented on a page.Notes:Off is the factory default setting."Long edge" assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape)."Short edge" assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).
Content TypeTextGraphicsText/PhotoPhoto	Specify the content of the original document.Note: Text is the factory default setting.
Content SourceBlack/White LaserInkjetPhoto/FilmMagazineNewspaperPressOther	Specify how the original document was produced.Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Darkness1-9	Lighten or darken the output.Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Dial Prefix Enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.
Dialing Prefix RulesPrefix Rule [x]	Establish a dialing prefix rule.
Automatic Redial0-9	Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number.Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Redial frequency1-200	Specify the number of minutes between redials.Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Behind a PABXYesNo	Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone.Note: No is the factory default setting.
Enable ECMYesNo	Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs.Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable Fax ScansOnOff	Fax files that are scanned at the printer.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Driver to faxYesNo	Allow the printer driver to send fax jobs.Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Allow Save as ShortcutOnOff	Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Dial ModeTonePulse	Specify the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulse.Note: Tone is the factory default setting.
Max Speed2400480096001440033600	Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent.Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanningOnOff	Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Scan PreviewOnOff	Specify whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Background Removal-4 to 4	Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Contrast0-5Best for content	Specify the contrast in the scanned image.Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Mirror ImageOffOn	Create a mirror image of the original document.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative ImageOffOn	Create a negative image of the original document.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail-4 to 4	Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible.Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edgeOffOn	Specify if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge prior to faxing.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness1–5	Adjust the sharpness of a fax.Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature-4 to 4	Specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool" values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Fax Receive Settings

Use To
Enable Fax ReceiveOnOff	Allow the printer to receive fax jobs.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Job WaitingNoneTonerToner and Supplies	Remove fax jobs from the print queue when the job requires specific unavailable resources.Note: None is the factory default setting.
Rings to Answer1–25	Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job.Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Auto ReductionOnOff	Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated fax source.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Paper SourceAutoTray [x]Multi-Purpose Feeder	Specify the paper source for printing incoming fax jobs.Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)OffOn	Enable two-sided (duplex) printing for incoming fax jobs.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Separator SheetsOffBefore JobAfter Job	Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder	Specify where the printer will pick the separator sheet.Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Output BinStandard BinBin [x]	Specify a bin for received faxes.Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Fax FooterOnOff	Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Max Speed2400480096001440033600	Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received.Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Fax ForwardingPrintPrint and ForwardForward	Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient.Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Forward toFaxE-mailFTPLDSSeSF	Specify the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded.Notes:•Fax is the factory default setting.•This menu item is available only from the Embedded Web Server.
Forward to Shortcut	Enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF).
Block No Name FaxOffOn	Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID or fax ID specified.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Banned Fax List Enable the list of blocked fax numbers stored in the printer.
Holding FaxesHeld Fax ModeOffAlways OnManualScheduledFax Holding Schedule	Enable fax holding all of the time or according to set schedule.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
StapleOff1 staple	Specify whether prints are stapled.Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Fax Log Settings

Use To
Transmission LogPrint logDo not print logPrint only for error	Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job.Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Receive Error LogPrint NeverPrint on Error	Enable printing of a receive error log following a receive error.Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.
Auto Print LogsOnOff	Enable automatic printing of fax logs.Notes:•On is the factory default setting.•Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.
Log Paper SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder	Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs.Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Logs DisplayRemote Station NameDialed Number	Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name or fax name returned.Note: Remote Station Name is the factory default setting.
Enable Job LogOnOff	Enable access to the Fax Job log.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable Call LogOnOff	Enable access to the Fax Call log.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Log Output BinStandard BinBin [x]	Specify the bin where fax logs are printed.Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.

Speaker Settings

Use To
Speaker ModeAlways OffOn until ConnectedAlways On	Specify the mode of the speaker.Notes:On until Connected is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until the fax connection is made.Always On turns the speaker on.Always Off turns the speaker off.
Speaker VolumeHighLow	Control the volume setting.Note: High is the factory default setting.
Ringer VolumeOffOn	Control the fax speaker ringer volume.Note: On is the factory default setting.

Answer On

Use To
All RingsSingle Ring OnlyDouble Ring OnlyTriple Ring OnlySingle or Double Rings OnlySingle or Triple Rings OnlyDouble or Triple Rings Only	Specify ring patterns when the printer is answering calls.Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.

E-mail Settings menu

Use To
E-mail Server SetupSubjectMessageFile Name	Specify e-mail server information.Notes:You can enter up to 255 characters in the Subject field.You can enter up to 512 characters in the Message field.You can enter up to 53 characters in the File Name field.
E-mail Server SetupSend me a copyNever appearsOn by defaultOff by defaultAlways On	Send a copy of the e-mail to the sender.Note: “Never appears” is the factory default setting.
E-mail Server SetupMax E-mail size0-65535 KB	Specify the maximum e-mail size in kilobytes.Note:E-mails above the specified size are not sent.
E-mail Server SetupSize Error Message	Send a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size limit.Note:You can enter up to 1024 characters.
E-mail Server SetupLimit destinations	Specify a domain name, such as a company domain name, and then limit e-mail destinations only to that domain name.Note:You can specify only one domain.
E-mail Server SetupWeb Link SetupServerLoginPasswordPathFile NameWeb Link	Define the e-mail server path name, for example:/directory/path.Notes:The characters * : ? < > | are invalid entries for a path name.You can enter up to 128 characters for Server, Login, Password, Path, and Web Link.You can enter up to 53 characters for File Name.
FormatPDF (.pdf)Secure PDFTIFF (.tif)JPEG (.jpg)XPS (.xps)	Specify the format of the scanned file.Note:"PDF (.pdf)" is the factory default setting.
PDF Version1.2-1.6A-1a	Set the version of the PDF file that will be scanned for e-mailing.Note:1.5 is the factory default setting.
Content TypeGraphicsTextText/PhotoPhoto	Specify the content of the original document.Note:Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content SourceBlack/White LaserColor LaserInkjetPhoto/FilmMagazineNewspaperPressOther	Specify how the original document was produced.Note:Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Resolution75 dpi150 dpi200 dpi300 dpi400 dpi600 dpi	Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch.Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.
Darkness1-9	Lighten or darken the output.Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
OrientationPortraitLandscape	Specify the page orientation of the scanned image.Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original SizeLetterLegalExecutiveFolioStatementOficio (Mexico)UniversalAuto Size SenseMixed SizesA4A5A6JIS B5Custom Scan Size [x]Book OriginalBusiness Card3 x 5 in.4 x 6 in.	Specify the paper size of the document being scanned.Notes:Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.A4 is the international factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)OffLong edgeShort edge	Specify the page orientation of text and graphics.Notes:Off is the factory default setting."Long edge" assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape)."Short edge" assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG QualityBest for content5-90	Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image.Notes:“Best for content” is the factory default setting.5 reduces the file size and quality of the image.90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Text Default5-90	Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image.Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default5-90	Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default5-90	Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
E-mail images sent asAttachmentWeb Link	Specify how the images are sent.Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.
Use Multi-Page TiffOnOff	Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan-to-e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.Notes:On is the factory default setting.This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Transmission LogPrint logDo not print logPrint only for error	Specify whether or not the transmission log prints.Note: “Print log “is the factory default setting.
Log Paper SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder	Specify the paper source for printing e-mail logs.Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
E-mail Bit Depth1 bit8 bit	Enable the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images.Note: “8 bit” is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanningOnOff	Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Scan PreviewOnOff	Specify whether or not a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Allow Save as ShortcutOnOff	Save e-mail addresses as shortcuts.Notes:On is the factory default setting.When set to Off, the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the e-mail Destination screen.
Background Removal-4 to 4	Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.Note:0 is the factory default setting.
Contrast0-5Best for content	Specify the contrast of the output.Note:“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Mirror ImageOffOn	Create a mirror image of the original document.Note:Off is the factory default setting.
Negative ImageOffOn	Create a negative image of the original document.Note:Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail-4 to 4	Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.Note:0 is the factory default setting.
Fix Scan SkewAutoOffOn	Correct slight skew in the scanned image.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu item appears only in select printer models.
Scan edge to edgeOffOn	Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.Note:Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness1-5	Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.Note:3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature-4 to 4	Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. “Cool” values generate a bluer output than the default, while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.Note:0 is the factory default setting.
Use cc:/bcc:OffOn	Enable the use of the cc and bcc fields.Note:Off is the factory default setting.

FTP Settings menu

Use To
FormatPDF (.pdf)Secure PDF (.pdf)TIFF (.tif)JPEG (.jpg)XPS (.xps)	Specify the format of the file for FTP sending.Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Version1.2-1.6A-1a	Set the version level of the PDF file for FTP sending.Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Content TypeTextGraphicsText/PhotoPhoto	Specify the content of the original document.Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content SourceBlack/White LaserColor LaserInkjetPhoto/FilmMagazineNewspaperPressOther	Specify how the original document was produced.Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Resolution75 dpi150 dpi200 dpi300 dpi400 dpi600 dpi	Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.
Darkness1-9	Lighten or darken the output.Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
OrientationPortraitLandscape	Specify the page orientation of the scanned image.Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original SizeLetterLegalExecutiveFolioStatementOficio (Mexico)UniversalAuto Size SenseMixed SizesA4A5A6JIS B5Custom Scan Size [x]Book OriginalBusiness Card3 x 5 in.4 x 6 in.	Specify the paper size of the original document.Notes:Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.A4 is the international factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)OffLong edgeShort edge	Specify the page orientation of text and graphics.Notes:Off is the factory default setting."Long edge" assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape )."Short edge" assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG QualityBest for content5-90	Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image.Notes:"Best for content" is the factory default setting.5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Text Default5-90	Set the quality of the text in relation to the file size and quality of the image.Note:75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default5-90	Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image.Note:75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default5-90	Set the quality of a photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image.Note:50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi-Page TIFFOnOff	Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan-to-FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.Notes:On is the factory default setting.This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Transmission LogPrint logDo not print logPrint only for error	Specify whether the transmission log prints.Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.
Log Paper SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder	Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs.Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
FTP bit Depth1 bit8 bit	Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images.Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
File Name Type a base file name.	Note: You can enter up to 53 characters.
Custom Job ScanningOnOff	Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Scan PreviewOnOff	Specify whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Allow Save as ShortcutOnOff	Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal-4 to 4	Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Contrast0-5Best for content	Specify the contrast of the output.Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Mirror ImageOffOn	Create a mirror image of the original document.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative ImageOffOn	Create a negative image of the original document.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail-4 to 4	Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.Note:0 is the factory default setting.
Fix Scan SkewAutoOffOn	Correct slight skew in the scanned image.Notes:•Off is the factory default setting.• This menu item is supported only in select printer models.
Scan edge to edgeOffOn	Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.Note:Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness1–5	Adjust the amount of sharpness of a scanned image.Note:3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature-4 to 4	Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool" values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.Note:0 is the factory default setting.

Flash Drive menu

Scan Settings

Scan Settings menu items and their descriptions

Use To
FormatPDF (.pdf)Secure PDFTIFF (.tif)JPEG (.jpg)XPS (.xps)	Specify the format of the file to be sent through FTP.Note: “PDF (.pdf)” is the factory default setting.
PDF Version1.2–1.6A-1a	Set the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTP.Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Content TypeTextGraphicsText/PhotoPhoto	Specify the content of the original document.Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content SourceBlack and White LaserColor LaserInkjetPhoto/FilmMagazineNewspaperPressOther	Specify how the original document was produced.Note: “Black and White Laser” is the factory default setting.
Resolution75 dpi150 dpi200 dpi300 dpi400 dpi600 dpi	Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.
Darkness1-9	Lighten or darken the output.Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
OrientationPortraitLandscape	Specify the orientation of the scanned image.Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original SizeLetterLegalExecutiveFolioStatementOficio (Mexico)Auto Size SenseMixed SizesA4A5A6JIS B5Difficult Media LetterDifficult Media A5Difficult Media LegalDifficult Media A4Custom Scan Size [x]Book OriginalBusiness Card3 x 5 in.4 x 6 in.	Specify the paper size of the original document.Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)OffLong EdgeShort Edge	Specify the page orientation of text and graphics.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG QualityBest for content5-90	Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality.Notes:"Best for content" is the factory default setting.5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Text Default5-90	Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image.Note:75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default5-90	Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and quality.Note:75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default5-90	Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality.Note:50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi-Page TIFFOnOff	Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.Notes:On is the factory default setting.This menu item applies to all scan functions.
File Name Type a base file name.	Note:A maximum of 53 characters is allowed.
Custom Job ScanningOnOff	Copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy job.Note:Off is the factory default setting.
Scan PreviewOnOff	Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.Note:Off is the factory default setting.
Background Removal-4 to 4	Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.Note:0 is the factory default setting.
Contrast0-5Best for content	Specify the contrast of the scanned image.Note:"Best for content" is the factory default setting.
Mirror ImageOffOn	Create a mirror image of the original document.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative ImageOffOn	Create a negative image of the original document.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail-4 to 4	Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edgeOffOn	Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness1–5	Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature-4 to 4	Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool" values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.

Print Settings

Print Settings menu items and their descriptions

Copies1–999	Specify a default number of copies for each print job.Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Paper SourceTray [x]MP FeederManual PaperManual Envelope	Set a default paper source for all print jobs.Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
CollateOff (1,1,1,2,2,2)On (1,2,1,2,1,2)	Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)1 sided2 sided	Specify whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page.Note: “1 sided” is the factory default setting.
StapleOffOn	Specify whether prints are stapled.Notes:•Off is the factory default setting.•This menu appears only when a staple finisher is installed.
Duplex BindingLong EdgeShort Edge	Define binding for duplexed pages in relation to page orientation.Notes:Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).
Paper SaverOff2-Up3-Up4-Up6-Up9-Up12-Up16-Up	Specify that multiple-page images be printed on one side of a paper.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.
Paper Saver OrderingHorizontalReverse HorizontalReverse VerticalVertical	Specify the positioning of multiple-page images.Notes:Horizontal is the factory default setting.Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation.
Paper Saver OrientationAutoLandscapePortrait	Specify the orientation of a multiple-page document.Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape.
Paper Saver BorderNoneSolid	Print a border on each page image.Note: None is the factory default setting.
Separator SheetsOffBetween CopiesBetween JobsBetween Pages	Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to “(1,2,3) (1,2,3).” If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document .
Separator Sheet SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder	Specify the paper source for separator sheets.Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank PagesDo Not PrintPrint	Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

Print Settings

Setup menu

Use To
Printer LanguagePCL EmulationPS Emulation	Set the printer language.Notes:PCL Emulation is the factory default setting.Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a software program from sending print jobs that use another printer language.
Job WaitingOnOff	Specify that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they require unavailable printer options or custom settings.Print jobs removed from the print queue are stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print normally. When the missing information or options are obtained, the stored jobs print.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu setting appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed. This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power.
Print AreaNormalWhole Page	Set the logical and physical printable area.Notes:Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to print data in the non-printable area defined by the Normal setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the non-printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the printer will clip the image at the Normal setting boundary. This affects only pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter. This has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter.
Download TargetRAMFlashDisk	Set the storage location for downloads.Notes:RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in the RAM is temporary.Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the printer is turned off.This menu setting appears only when a formatted, working flash drive or printer hard disk is installed.
Resource SaveOnOff	Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as fonts and macros stored in the RAM, when the printer receives a job that requires more memory than is available.Notes:Off is the factory default setting. This sets the printer to retain the downloads only until memory is needed. Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs.On retains the downloads during language changes and printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory, then Memory Full [38] appears, and downloads are not deleted.
Print All OrderAlphabeticalOldest FirstNewest First	Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed when Print All is selected.Note: Alphabetical is the factory default setting. Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel.

Finishing menu

Use To
Sides (Duplex)1 sided2 sided	Specify whether two-sided (duplex) printing is set as the default for all print jobs.Notes:“1 sided” is the factory default setting.You can set two-sided printing from the printer software.For Windows users:Click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.For Macintosh users:Choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.
Duplex BindingLong EdgeShort Edge	Define the way duplexed pages are bound and printed in relation to page orientation.Notes:Long Edge is the factory default setting. This assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies1–999	Specify the default number of copies for each print job.Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank PagesDo Not PrintPrint	Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Collate(1,1,1) (2,2,2)(1,2,3) (1,2,3)	Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.Notes:“(1,1,1) (2,2,2)” is the factory default setting.On stacks the print job in sequence.
Separator SheetsOffBetween CopiesBetween JobsBetween Pages	Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.Notes:None is the factory default setting.Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to “(1,2,3) (1,2,3).” If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job. This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document.
Separator SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder	Specify the paper source for separator sheets.Notes:Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for Manual Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
Paper SaverOff2-Up3-Up4-Up6-Up9-Up12-Up16-Up	Print multiple-page images on one side of a paper.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.
Paper Saver OrderingHorizontalReverse HorizontalReverse VerticalVertical	Specify the positioning of multiple-page images when using Paper Saver.Notes:Horizontal is the factory default setting.Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation.
Paper Saver OrientationAutoLandscapePortrait	Specify the orientation of a multiple-page document.Note:Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape.
Paper Saver BorderNoneSolid	Print a border when using Paper Saver.Note: None is the factory default setting.
Staple JobOffOn	Specify whether printed output is stapled.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu item appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed.
Run Stapler Test	Print a report that confirms that the staple finisher is functioning properly.Note: This menu item appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed.

Quality menu

Use To
Print Resolution300 dpi600 dpi1200 dpi1200 Image Q2400 Image Q	Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch.Note: 600 dpi is the factory default setting.
Pixel BoostOffFontsHorizontallyVerticallyBoth directionsIsolated	Enable more pixels to print in clusters for clarity, in order to enhance images horizontally or vertically, or to enhance fonts.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Toner Darkness1-10	Lighten or darken the printed output.Notes:8 is the factory default setting.Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
Enhance Fine LinesOnOff	Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical circuit diagrams, and flow charts.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.You can set this option from the printer software. For Windows users, click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.To set this option using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer IP address in the Web browser address field.
Gray CorrectionAutoOff	Automatically adjust the contrast enhancement applied to images.Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Brightness-6 to 6	Adjust the printed output either by lightening or darkening it. You can conserve toner by lightening the output.Note:0 is the factory default setting.
Contrast0–5	Adjust the contrast of printed objects.Note:0 is the factory default setting.

Job Accounting menu

Note: This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed. Make sure the printer hard disk is not read/write- or write-protected.

Use To
Job Accounting LogOffOn	Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Job Accounting Utilities Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive.
Accounting Log FrequencyWeeklyMonthly	Determine and set how often a log file is created.Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.
Log Action at End of FrequencyNoneE-mail Current LogE-mail & Delete Current LogPost Current LogPost & Delete Current Log	Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires.Note: None is the factory default setting.
Disk Near Full LevelOff1-99	Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Disk Near Full Action.Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Disk Near Full ActionNoneE-mail Current LogE-mail & Delete Current LogE-mail & Delete Oldest LogPost Current LogPost & Delete Current LogPost & Delete Oldest LogDelete Current LogDelete Oldest LogDelete All LogsDelete All But Current	Determine and set how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full.Notes:None is the factory default setting.The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is triggered.
Disk Full ActionNoneE-mail & Delete Current LogE-mail & Delete Oldest LogPost & Delete Current LogPost & Delete Oldest LogDelete Current LogDelete Oldest LogDelete All LogsDelete All But Current	Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum limit (100MB).Note: None is the factory default setting.
URL to Post Logs Determine and set w	where the printer posts job accounting logs.
E-mail Address to Send Logs	Specify the e-mail address to which the printer sends job accounting logs.
Log File Prefix Specify the prefix you want for the log file name.	Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the default log file prefix.

Utilities menu

Use To
Remove Held JobsConfidentialHeldNot RestoredAll	Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk.Notes:Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not affected.Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the printer hard disk or memory.
Format FlashYesNo	Format the flash memory.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is being formatted.Notes:Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.No cancels the format request.Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory card in the printer.The flash memory option card must not be read/write- or write-protected.This menu item appears only when a non-defective flash memory card is installed.
Delete Downloads on DiskDelete NowDo Not Delete	Delete downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs, and parked jobs.Notes:Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the display to return to the originating screen after the deletion.Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu for touch-screen printer models. When selected in non-touch-screen printer models, Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating screen after the deletion.
Activate Hex Trace Assist in isolating	the source of a print job problem.Notes:When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation, and control codes are not executed.To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn off or reset the printer.
Coverage EstimatorOffOn	Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.Note: Off is the factory default setting.

XPS menu

Use To
Print Error PagesOffOn	Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.Note: Off is the factory default setting.

PDF menu

Use To
Scale to FitYesNo	Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.Note: No is the factory default setting.
AnnotationsDo Not PrintPrint	Print annotations in a PDF.Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

PostScript menu

Use To
Print PS ErrorOnOff	Print a page containing the PostScript error.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Lock PS Startup ModeOnOff	Disable the SysStart file.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Font PriorityResidentFlash/Disk	Establish the font search order.Notes:•Resident is the factory default setting.•This menu item is available only when a formatted flash memory option card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly.• Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not read/write-, write-, or password-protected.•Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.

PCL Emul menu

Use To
Font SourceResidentDiskDownloadFlashAll	Specify the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu.Notes:“Resident” is the factory default setting. Resident shows the factory default set of fonts downloaded in the RAM.“Flash” and “Disk” settings show all fonts resident in that option.The flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be read/write-, write-, or password-protected.“Download” shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.“All” shows all fonts available to any option.
Font NameCourier 10	Identify a specific font and the option where it is stored.Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting. Courier 10 shows the font name, font ID, and the storage location in the printer. The font source abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and D for Download.
Symbol Set10U PC-812U PC-850	Specify the symbol set for each font name.Notes:10U PC-8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC-850 is the international factory default setting.A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation, and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation SettingsPoint Size1.00–1008.00	Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.Notes:12 is the factory default setting.Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point equals approximately 0.014 inch.Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25-point increments.
PCL Emulation SettingsPitch0.08–100	Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.Notes:10 is the factory default setting.Pitch refers to the number of fixed-space characters per inch (cpi).Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01-cpi increments.For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but it cannot be changed.
PCL Emulation SettingsOrientationPortraitLandscape	Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.Notes:Portrait is the factory default setting. Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page.Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.
PCL Emulation SettingsLines per Page1–255	Specify the number of lines that print on each page.Notes:60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the Paper Size and Orientation you want before setting Lines per Page.
PCL Emulation SettingsA4 Width198 mm203 mm	Set the printer to print on A4-size paper.Notes:“198 mm” is the factory default setting.The 203-mm setting sets the width of the page to allow printing of eighty 10-pitch characters.
PCL Emulation SettingsAuto CR after LFOnOff	Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after a line feed (LF) control command.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PCL Emulation SettingsAuto LF after CROnOff	Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a carriage return (CR) control command.Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Tray RenumberAssign MP FeederOffNone0-199Assign Tray [x]OffNone0-199Assign Manual PaperOffNone0-199Assign Manual EnvOffNone0-199	Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use different source assignments for trays and feeders.Notes:“Off” is the factory default setting.“None” ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This option appears only when it is selected by the PCL 5 interpreter.“0-199” allows a custom setting to be assigned.
Tray RenumberView Factory DefaultsMPF Default = 8T1 Default = 1T1 Default = 4T1 Default = 5T1 Default = 20T1 Default = 21Env Default = 6MPaper Default = 2MEnv Default = 3	Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray or feeder.
Tray RenumberRestore DefaultsYesNo	Restore all tray and feeder assignments to the factory default settings.

HTML menu

Use To
Font Name	Joanna MT	Set the default font for HTML documents.
Albertus MT	Letter Gothic	Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not specify a font.
Antique Olive	Lubalin Graph
Apple Chancery	Marigold
Arial MT	MonaLisa Recut
Avant Garde	Monaco
Bodoni	New CenturySbk
Bookman	New York
Chicago	Optima
Clarendon	Oxford
Cooper Black	Palatino
Copperplate	StempelGaramond
Coronet	Taffy
Courier	Times
Eurostile	TimesNewRoman
Garamond	Univers
Geneva	Zapf Chancery
Gill Sans	NewSansMTCS
Goudy	NewSansMTCT
Helvetica	New SansMTJA
Hoefler Text	NewSansMTKO
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers

Use To
Font Size1–255 pt	Set the default font size for HTML documents.Notes:•12 pt is the factory default setting.• Font size can be increased in 1-point increments.
Scale1–400%	Scale the default font for HTML documents.Notes:•100% is the factory default setting.•Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
OrientationPortraitLandscape	Set the page orientation for HTML documents.Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Margin Size8–255 mm	Set the page margin for HTML documents.Notes:19 mm is the factory default setting.Margin size can be increased in 1-mm increments.
BackgroundsDo Not PrintPrint	Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.Note: Print is the factory default setting.

Image menu

Use To
Auto FitOnOff	Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings for some images.
InvertOnOff	Invert bitonal monochrome images.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
ScalingAnchor Top LeftBest FitAnchor CenterFit Height/WidthFit HeightFit Width	Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.Notes:Best Fit is the factory default setting.When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
OrientationPortraitLandscapeReverse PortraitReverse Landscape	Set the image orientation.Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Help menu

The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer (MFP) as PDF files. They contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks, including copying, scanning, and faxing.

English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer. Other translations are available at http://support.lexmark.com.

Menu item Description
Print All Guides Prints all the guides
Copy Guide Provides information about	making copies and changing settings
E-mail Guide	Provides information about sending e-mails using addresses, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings
Fax Guide Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings
FTP Guide Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings
Print Defects Guide Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints
Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information
Supplies Guide Provides part numbers for ordering supplies

Saving money and the environment

Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:

•The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
- The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle

By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.

Saving paper and toner

Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.

For more information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see “Using Eco-Mode” on page 212.

Conserving supplies

Use both sides of the paper

If your printer model supports duplex printing, then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper by selecting 2-sided printing from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar.

Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper

You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple-page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by selecting a setting from the Multipage printing (N-Up) section of the Print dialog screen.

Check your first draft for accuracy

Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:

• Use the preview feature, which you can select from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar to see how the document will look like before you print it.
• Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.

Avoid paper jams

Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 237.

Saving energy

Using Eco-Mode

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > General Settings > Eco-Mode > select a setting

Use To
Off	Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco-Mode. Off supports the performance specifications of the printer.
Energy Reduce	energy use, especially when the printer is idle.Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the first page is printed.The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
Energy/Paper	Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper	Enable the automatic two-sided (duplex) feature.Turn off print log features.

3 Click Submit.

Reducing printer noise

Enable Quiet Mode to reduce printer noise.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting

Use To
On Reduce printer noise.	Notes:•Print jobs are processed at a reduced speed.•Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print. There will be a short delay before the first page is printed.
Off Use factory default settings.	Note: This setting supports the performance specifications of the printer.

3 Click Submit.

Adjusting Sleep mode

To save energy, decrease the number of minutes the printer waits before it enters Sleep mode.

Available settings range from 1–180 minutes. The factory default setting is 30 minutes.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.
3 In the Sleep Mode field, enter the number of minutes you want for the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode.
4 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode

2 In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes you want for the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode.

3 Touch

Using Hibernate Mode

Hibernate is an ultra-low power operating mode. When operating in Hibernate mode, the printer is essentially off, and all other systems and devices are powered down safely.

Note: The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > General Settings > Sleep Button Settings.

3 From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button drop-down menu, select Hibernate.

4 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings

2 Touch Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button.

3 Touch Hibernate > √.

Setting Hibernate Timeout

Hibernate Timeout lets you set the amount of time the printer waits after a print job is processed before it goes into a reduced power state.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.

3 From the Hibernate Timeout menu, select the number of hours, days, weeks, or months you want for the printer to wait before it goes into a reduced power state.

4 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Hibernate Timeout

2 Select the amount of time the printer waits after a print job is processed before it enters Hibernate mode.

3 Touch

Using Schedule Power Modes

Schedule Power Modes lets you schedule when the printer goes into a reduced power state or into Ready state.

Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > General Settings > Schedule Power Modes.

3 From the Action menu, select the power mode.

4 From the Time menu, select the time.

5 From the Day(s) menu, select the day or days.

6 Click Add.

Adjusting the brightness of the display

To save energy, or if you are have trouble reading your display, adjust the brightness of the display.

Available settings range from 20–100. The factory default setting is 100.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > General Settings.

3 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.

4 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings > Screen Brightness

2 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.

3 Touch

Recycling

Recycling Lexmark products

To return Lexmark products for recycling:

1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.

Recycling Lexmark packaging

Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.

Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.

The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.

When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the box.

Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling

Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled.

To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:

1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Securing the printer

Statement of Volatility

Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.

Types of memory Description
Volatile memory	Your printer uses standard Random Access Memory (RAM) to temporarily buffer user data during simple print and copy jobs.
Non-volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non-	volatile memory:EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used to store the operating system, device settings, network information, scanner and bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.
Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive insta	led. The printerhard disk is designed for device-specific functionality. This lets the device retain buffered user data from complex scan, print, copy, and fax jobs, as well as form data, and font data.

Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:

•The printer is being decommissioned.
•The printer hard disk is being replaced.
- The printer is being moved to a different department or location.
- The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
- The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
•The printer is being sold to another organization.

Disposing of a printer hard disk

Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.

In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises.

• Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data
• Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
• Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits

Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.

Erasing volatile memory

The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the buffered data, simply turn off the printer.

Erasing non-volatile memory

• Individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions—Erase information and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
• Fax data—Erase fax settings and data by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.

1 Turn off the printer.

2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears.

The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of the standard home screen icons.

3 Touch Wipe All Settings.

The printer will restart several times during this process.

Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, faxes, and passwords from the printer memory.

4 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.

The printer will perform a power-on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Erasing printer hard disk memory

Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.

Configuring Disk Wiping in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left by scan, print, copy, and fax jobs, by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.

Using the printer control panel

1 Turn off the printer.

2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears.

The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of the standard home screen icons.

3 Touch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:

- Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.

- Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22-M standard for securely erasing data from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.

4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.

Notes:

- A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.

- Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.

5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.

The printer will perform a power-on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Configuring printer hard disk encryption

Enable the hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.

Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.

Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.

3 From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.

Notes:

• Enabling disk encryption will erase the content of the printer hard disk.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.

4 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears.

The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. Once the printer is fully powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of standard home screen icons such as Copy or Fax.

3 Touch Disk Encryption > Enable.

Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.

4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.

Notes:

• Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.

- A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer will return to the Enable/Disable screen.

5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.

The printer will perform a power-on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Finding printer security information

In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, visit the Lexmark security Web page.

You can also see the Embedded Web Server Administrator's Guide for additional information:

1 Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to Software and Solutions > Other Applications.
2 Click the Manuals tab, and then select the Embedded Web Server Administrator's Guide.

Maintaining the printer

Warning—Potential Damage: Failure to maintain optimum printer performance, or to replace parts and supplies, may cause damage to your printer.

Cleaning the printer parts

Cleaning the printer

Note: You may need to perform this task after every few months.

Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer warranty.

1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the electrical outlet.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.

2 Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.
3 Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.
4 Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water, and use it to wipe the outside of the printer.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents to prevent damage to the exterior of the printer.

5 Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before sending a new print job.

Cleaning the scanner glass

Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.

1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.

2 Open the scanner cover.

Illustration of an open printer with a red arrow pointing to the lid area, indicating a process or operation (no text or symbols present)

3 Clean all the areas shown, and then let them dry.

Diagram of a printer with labeled parts showing open and closed sections

1	White underside of the scanner cover
2	Scanner glass
3	ADF glass
4	White underside of the ADF cover

4 Close the scanner cover.

Checking the status of parts and supplies

Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel

From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.

Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server

Note: Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Device Status > More Details.

Estimated number of remaining pages

The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer. Its accuracy may vary significantly and is dependent on many factors, such as actual document content, print quality settings, and other printer settings.

The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption is different from the historical printing consumption. Consider the variable level of accuracy before purchasing or replacing supplies based on the estimate. Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer, initial estimates assume future supplies consumption based on the International Organization for Standardization* test methods and page content.

* Average continuous black declared cartridge yield in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.

Ordering supplies

To order supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com or contact the place where you purchased the printer.

Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter- or A4-size plain paper.

Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies

Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components. Use of third-party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts is not covered by the warranty. All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.

Ordering toner cartridges

Notes:

•The estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19752 standard.
- Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield.

Item Return Program cartridge
United States and Canada
Toner Cartridge 601
High Yield Toner Cartridge 601H
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 601X
European Union, European Economic Area, and Switzerland
Toner Cartridge 602
High Yield Toner Cartridge 602H
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 602X
Asia Pacific region (includes Australia and New Zealand)
Toner Cartridge 603
High Yield Toner Cartridge 603H
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 603X
Latin America (includes Puerto Rico and Mexico)
Toner Cartridge 604
High Yield Toner Cartridge 604H
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 604X
Africa, Middle East, Central Eastern Europe, and Commonwealth of Independent States
Toner Cartridge 605
High Yield Toner Cartridge 605H
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 605X
For more information on countries located in each region, visit www.lexmark.com/regions.

Item Regular cartridge
Worldwide
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 600XA

Ordering an imaging unit

Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may cause imaging unit parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner from toner cartridge.

For more information on replacing the imaging unit, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.

Part name Lexmark Return Program Regular
Imaging unit 500Z 500ZA

Ordering staple cartridges

Part name Part number
Staple cartridges 35S8500

Ordering a maintenance kit

Notes:

• Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit.
• The separator roller, fuser, pick rollers, transfer roller, and redrive assembly are all included in the maintenance kit and can be individually ordered and replaced if necessary.
• Contact your service representative to replace the maintenance kit.

Recommended maintenance kits and part numbers

Maintenance kit Part number
100-V maintenance kit*	40X9147
110-V maintenance kit 40X9137
220-V maintenance kit 40X9138
* This is available only in Japan.

Ordering an ADF separator roller

Order an ADF separator roller when the ADF fails to pick paper or picks more than one sheet of paper at a time.

For information on replacing the ADF separator roller, see the instruction sheet that came with the part.

Recommended part numbers

Part name Part number
Separator roller 40X9108

Storing supplies

Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready to use them.

Do not expose supplies to:

• Direct sunlight
  •Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)

•High humidity above 80%
• Salty air
•Corrosive gases
•Heavy dust

Replacing supplies

Replacing the toner cartridge

1 Press the button on the right side of the printer, and then open the front door.

Diagram showing a device's internal structure with numbered annotations (1 and 2) indicating process flow or component selection.

2 Pull the toner cartridge out using the handle.

Cutaway view of a printer internal structure showing internal components and a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

3 Unpack the toner cartridge, and then remove all packing materials.

4 Shake the new cartridge to redistribute the toner.

Hand holding a black cylindrical object with red arrows indicating rotational motion (no text or symbols)

5 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

Two views of a mechanical device showing internal components and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

6 Close the front door.

Replacing the imaging unit

1 Press the button on the right side of the printer, and then open the front door.

Diagram showing a device's internal structure with numbered annotations (1 and 2) indicating process flow or component selection.

2 Pull the toner cartridge out using the handle.

Cross-sectional diagram of a printer internal structure showing internal components and a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

3 Lift the green handle, and then pull the imaging unit out of the printer.

Interior view of a printer showing internal components and a red arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

4 Unpack the new imaging unit, and then shake it.

Illustration of a hand holding a device with red arrows indicating motion or flow (no text or symbols)

5 Remove all packing materials from the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.

3D illustration of a mechanical component with a blue internal layer and a red prohibition symbol (no text or labels)

6 Insert the imaging unit into the printer by aligning the arrows on the side rails of the imaging unit with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer.

Diagram showing a device with a green directional arrow and a red arrow indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols present)

7 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer.

Two views of a mechanical device showing internal components and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

8 Close the front door.

Replacing the staple cartridge

1 Open the stapler door.

Close-up of a mechanical device showing internal components and a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

2 Pull out the staple cartridge from the finisher.

Diagram showing two views of a device with labeled components, marked as ① and ②, indicating assembly or installation steps.

3 Hold both sides of the empty staple case with your fingers, pull, and then lift the empty staple case from the cartridge.

Diagram showing three steps of a device component assembly, labeled 1, 2, and 3 with arrows indicating process flow.

4 Remove the spare staple case from its holder.

Close-up of a mechanical device with a red arrow pointing to a component (no visible text or symbols)

5 Insert the spare staple case into the staple cartridge.

Technical diagram showing two views of a mechanical assembly with red arrows indicating process steps, labeled 1 and 2.

6 Push the staple cartridge into the finisher until it clicks into place.

Diagram showing two steps of a device component with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement or assembly.

7 Replace the spare staple case for future use.

8 Close the stapler door.

Two diagrams showing a device with a red arrow pointing to a component, one open and one emitting red rays (no text or symbols)

Moving the printer

Before moving the printer

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:

- Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

- Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.

- If an optional tray is installed, then remove it from the printer. To remove the optional tray, slide the latch on the right side of the tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place.

Exterior view of a printer with a magnified inset showing red arrows pointing to a document (no text or symbols present)

• Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
  •Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
• Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it.

Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.

Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty.

Moving the printer to another location

The printer and its hardware options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:

• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.
• Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the hardware options.
• Keep the printer in an upright position.
• Avoid severe jarring movements.

Shipping the printer

When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.

Managing the printer

Finding advanced networking and administrator information

This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded Web Server Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

Checking the virtual display

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Check the virtual display that appears at the top left corner of the screen.

The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.

Setting up e-mail alerts

Configure the printer to send you e-mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed or added, or when there is a paper jam.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings.

3 From the Other Settings menu, click E-mail Alert Setup.
4 Select the items you want to be notified on, and then type the e-mail addresses.
5 Click Submit.

Note: For information on setting up the e-mail server, contact your system support person.

Viewing reports

You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the printer, network, and supplies.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.

Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server

You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low, low, very low, or reach their end-of-life by setting the selectable alerts.

Notes:

• Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge, imaging unit, and maintenance kit.
• All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low, low, and very low supply conditions. Not all selectable alerts can be set for the end-of-life supply condition. E-mail selectable alert is available for all supply conditions.
• The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for some supply conditions.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Supply Notifications.

3 From the drop-down menu for each supply, select one of the following notification options:

Notification Description
Off The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs.
E-mail Only	The printer generates an e-mail when the supply condition is reached. The status of the supply appears on the menus page and status page.
Warning	The printer displays the warning message and generates an e-mail about the status of the supply. The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached.
Continuable Stop^1	The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached, and the user needs to press a button to continue printing.
Non Continuable Stop^1,2	The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached. The supply must be replaced to continue printing.
^1 The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled. ^2 The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.

4 Click Submit.

Restoring factory default settings

If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 59.

If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the Wipe All Settings option. For more information, see “Erasing non-volatile memory” on page 218.

Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not affected.

From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now >

Clearing jams

Jam error messages appear on the printer display and include the area of the printer where the jam occurred. When there is more than one jam, the number of jammed pages is displayed.

Avoiding jams

Load paper properly

•Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.

Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper

• Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.
• Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it before printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
• Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.

3D illustration of a printer with a red downward arrow placed on top, indicating compression or compression (no text or symbols present)

• Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing tightly against the paper or envelopes.
• Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper.

Use recommended paper

• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
  •Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.

Diagram illustrating three-step folding or cutting process with red arrows indicating direction of movement

• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.
• Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
• Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations.

Understanding jam messages and locations

When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location and information to clear the jam appears on the printer display. Open the doors, covers, and trays indicated on the display to remove the jam.

Notes:

• When Jam Assist is set to On, the printer automatically flushes blank pages or pages with partial prints to the standard bin after a jammed page has been cleared. Check your printed output stack for discarded pages.
• When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages. However, the Auto setting does not guarantee that the page will print.

Diagram of a printer with numbered parts, highlighting the internal structure and detail of the printer's internal components.

	Jam access area Printer control panel message What to do
1 Automatic document feeder (ADF)		[x]-page jam, open ADF to clear jam. [28y.xx]	Remove all paper from the ADF tray, and then remove the jammed paper.
2	Standard bin	[x]-page jam, clear standard bin. [20y.xx]	Remove the jammed paper.
3	Front door	[x]-page jam, open front door. [20y.xx]	Open the front door, then remove the toner cartridge and imaging unit, and then the jammed paper.
4 Multipurpose feeder		[x]-page jam, clear manual feeder. [25y.xx]	Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder, and then remove the jammed paper.
5	Tray 1	[x]-page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [23y.xx]	Pull out tray 1 completely, then push the front duplex flap down, and then remove the jammed paper.Note: You may need to open the rear door to clear some 23y.xx paper jams.
6	Tray [x]	[x]-page jam, open tray [x]. [24y.xx]	Pull the indicated tray out, and then remove the jammed paper.
7	Rear door	[x]-page jam, open rear door. [20y.xx]	Open the rear door, and then remove the jammed paper.
8 Finisher rear door [x]-page jam, remove all pages from the finisher's accumulator.Leave paper in bin [45y.xx]			•Open the finisher rear door, and then remove the jammed paper.•Open the trap door, and then remove the jammed paper.
9 Finisher output bin [x]-page jam, remove all pages from the output bin. Leave paper in bin [45y.xx]			•Move the left tamper arm to the left and the right tamper arm to the right, and then remove the jammed paper from the finisher bin.•Open the finisher rear door and the trap door, and then remove any jammed pages.

[x]-page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx]

1 Remove all original documents from the ADF tray.

Note: The message is cleared when the pages are removed from the ADF tray.

2 Open the ADF cover.

3D rendering of a printer internal structure with a red arrow indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols)

3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

4 Close the ADF cover.

5 Straighten the edges of the original documents, then load the documents into the ADF, and then adjust the paper guide.

6 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]-page jam, clear standard bin. [20y.xx]

1 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Illustration of a printer with paper being inserted, showing paper roll and red arrows (no text or symbols)

2 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]-page jam, open rear door. [20y.xx]

1 Open the front door to loosen the jammed paper in the rear door.

Diagram showing a printer's internal structure with labeled parts and red arrows indicating motion or flow, highlighting components 1 and 2.

2 Gently pull down the rear door.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

Close-up of a printer's internal structure with a red arrow indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols visible)

3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3D rendering of a printer's internal structure with red arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

4 Close the front and rear door.

5 From the printer control panel, select Done to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]-page jam, open front door. [20y.xx]

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

1 Press the button on the right side of the printer, and then open the front door.

Diagram showing a device's internal structure with numbered annotations (1 and 2) indicating process flow or component selection.

2 Pull out the toner cartridge using the handle.

Cutaway view of a printer internal structure showing internal components and wiring (no text or symbols visible)

3 Lift the green handle, and then pull out the imaging unit from the printer.

Cutaway view of a printer internal structure showing internal components and a red arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the shiny blue photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may affect the quality of future print jobs.

3D illustration of a battery pack with a blue stripe and a red prohibition symbol (no text or labels)

4 Place the imaging unit aside on a flat, smooth surface.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

5 Lift the green flap in front of the printer.

Close-up of a printer's internal printing process showing paper being inserted into a machine (no text or symbols visible)

6 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Close-up of a printer's internal structure showing green and white components with red arrows indicating motion or movement (no text or symbols)

7 Insert the imaging unit by aligning the arrows on the side rails of the unit with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer, and then insert the imaging unit into the printer.

Diagram showing a device's internal structure before and after disassembly, with no visible text or symbols.

8 Insert the toner cartridge by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer, and then insert the cartridge into the printer.

Two views of a mechanical device showing internal components and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

9 Close the front door.

10 From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]-page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [23y.xx]

1 Pull out the tray completely.

Exterior view of a printer with paper feed being inserted, showing paper sheet and paper holder (no text or symbols visible)

2 Locate the lever, and then pull it down to release the jam.

Diagram showing a printer being inserted into a paper airplane, with a magnified inset highlighting the blade structure (no text or symbols present)

3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Diagram of a printer printer with paper being inserted, showing red arrows indicating process flow (no text or symbols present)

4 Insert the tray.

5 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]-page jam, clear manual feeder. [25y.xx]

1 From the multipurpose feeder, firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out. Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3D rendering of a printer's internal structure with paper feed and red arrows indicating process flow (no text or symbols)

2 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Three-step illustration showing a folding or rolling process: top panel with red arrows indicating rotation, middle panel with a flat blade, and bottom panel with red arrows indicating compression (no text or symbols)

3 Reload paper into the multipurpose feeder.

Illustration of a printer with a paper being inserted, showing a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

Note: Make sure the paper guide lightly rests against the edge of the paper.

4 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]-page jam, open tray [x]. [24y.xx]

1 Pull out the tray completely.

Note: The message on the printer display indicates the tray where the jammed paper is located.

Exterior view of a printer with paper feed being inserted, showing paper sheet and paper holder (no text or symbols visible)

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Close-up of a printer's front panel showing paper feed and red directional arrows indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols visible)

3 Insert the tray.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]-page jam, remove all pages from the output bin. Leave paper in bin. [45y.xx]

Paper jam in the finisher bin

1 Empty the standard bin.

Close-up of a printer's internal structure with red arrows indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols visible)

2 Move the tamper arms to the sides.

Close-up of a printer's front panel showing internal structure with red arrows indicating features (no text or symbols visible)

3 Remove all jammed pages from inside the access areas.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Close-up of a printer's front panel showing paper being cut with red arrows indicating compression (no text or symbols)

4 If necessary, touch Done from the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Paper jam in the finisher rear door

1 Open the finisher rear door.

Interior view of a printer showing the paper cut into a plastic sheet with a red arrow indicating the process (no text or symbols visible)

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Interior view of a printer showing the paper feeding into a slot, with red arrows indicating the process (no text or symbols visible)

3 Open the finisher trap door, remove any paper fragments inside the trap door.

Note: After removing any jammed paper in the finisher bin or in the finisher rear door, open the trap door to remove any paper fragments.

Close-up of a printer's front panel showing internal components and a red arrow indicating a motion or force (no text or symbols visible)

Close-up of a computer monitor with ventilation slots and a red logo overlay (no readable text or symbols)

4 Close the trap door.

Close-up of an open printer's internal structure with a red arrow indicating a downward motion (no text or symbols visible)

5 Close the finisher rear door.

Interior view of a printer showing internal components and a red arrow indicating a process (no text or symbols visible)

6 If necessary, touch Done from the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Staple jam in the finisher

1 Open the staple access door.

Interior view of a mechanical device showing internal components and a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

2 Pull out the staple cartridge from the finisher.

Diagram showing two views of a device with labeled components, marked as (1) and (2), indicating assembly or installation steps.

3 Lift the staple guard, and then remove any jammed or loose staples.

Diagram of a battery pack with a red arrow indicating flow or movement, showing internal components and wiring (no text or symbols)

4 Press down the staple guard until it clicks into place.

3D rendering of a mechanical component with a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

5 Insert stapler cartridge back into the finisher until it clicks into place.

Diagram showing two steps of inserting a device into a device, labeled 1 and 2 with red arrows indicating movement.

6 Close the staple access door.

7 If necessary, touch Done from the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]-page jam, remove all pages from the finisher's accumulator. Leave paper in bin. [45y.xx]

Paper jam in the finisher bin

1 Empty the standard bin.

Close-up of a printer's front panel showing paper feeding into a slot, with red arrows indicating the cutting edge (no text or symbols visible)

2 Move the tamper arms to the sides.

Close-up of a printer's front panel showing internal structure with red arrows indicating features (no text or symbols visible)

3 Remove all jammed pages from inside the access areas.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Close-up of a printer's front panel showing paper roll and red arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

4 If necessary, touch Done from the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Paper jam in the finisher rear door

1 Open the finisher rear door.

Close-up of an HP printer's internal structure showing a paper feeding into a paper sheet, with a red arrow indicating the paper's direction (no text or symbols visible)

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Interior view of a printer showing the paper holder and printer blade with red arrows indicating features (no text or symbols visible)

3 Open the finisher trap door, and then remove any paper fragments from inside the trap door.

Note: After removing any jammed paper in the finisher rear door, open the trap door to remove any paper fragments.

Two-panel image showing a printer interior with a red arrow indicating a motion or change, and a close-up of the printer's internal structure (no text or symbols visible)

4 Close the trap door.

Interior view of a printer showing internal components and a red arrow indicating a downward motion (no text or symbols present)

5 Close the finisher rear door.

Close-up of an HP printer's internal structure showing a paper feeding into a print case, with a red arrow indicating the process (no text or symbols visible)

6 If necessary, touch Done from the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Troubleshooting

• "Understanding the printer messages" on page 257
• "Solving printer problems" on page 271
• "Solving print problems" on page 278
• "Solving copy problems" on page 304
• "Solving fax problems" on page 308
• "Solving scanner problems" on page 314
• "Solving home screen applications problems" on page 319
• "Embedded Web Server does not open" on page 319
• "Contacting customer support" on page 320

Understanding the printer messages

Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch [41.xy]

Install a toner cartridge that matches the region number of the printer. x indicates the value of the printer region. y indicates the value of the cartridge region. x and y can have the following values:

List of printer and toner cartridge regions

Region number Region
0	G	I	o	b
1 United States, Canada
2 European Economic Area (EEA), Switzerland
3 Asia Pacific, Australia, New Zealand
4 Latin America
5 Africa, Middle East, rest of Europe
9	I	n	v	a

Notes:

• The x and y values are the .xy of the error code shown on the printer control panel.
  •The x and y values must match for printing to continue.

Cartridge low [88.xy]

You may need to order a replacement toner cartridge. If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Cartridge nearly low [88.xy]

If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Cartridge very low, [x] estimated pages remain [88.xy]

You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.

If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
• Cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
• Cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
• Cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load [orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
• Cancel the print job.

Check tray [x] connection

Try one or more of the following:

- Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.

If the error occurs a second time, then:

1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the indicated tray.
4 Reattach the tray.
5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6 Turn the printer back on.

If the error occurs again, then:

1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the tray.
4 Contact customer support.

- From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and resume the job.

Close front door

Close the front door of the printer.

Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job [2yy.xx]

Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan job.
• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner glass immediately after the last successful scan job.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.

Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying, faxing, or e-mailing.

- Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.

Complex page, some data may not have printed [39]

Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
• Cancel current print job.
  •Install additional printer memory.

Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57]

Held jobs are invalidated because of the following possible changes in the printer:

•The printer firmware has been updated.
•The tray for the print job has been removed.
- The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port.
- The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a different printer model.

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Defective flash detected [51]

Try one or more of the following:

-Replace the defective flash memory card.
- From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
- Cancel the current print job.

Disk full [62]

Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
  • Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.

Disk must be formatted for use in this device

From the printer control panel, touch Format disk to format the printer hard disk and clear the message.

Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk.

Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.

Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
  •Install a hard disk with higher capacity.

Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.

An unsupported USB device is inserted. Remove the USB device, and then insert a supported one.

Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.

An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the USB hub, and then install a supported one.

Fax memory full

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.

Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on. If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.

Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

Fax Station Name not set up. Contact system administrator.

Try either of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact your system support person.

Fax Station Number not set up. Contact system administrator.

Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact your system support person.

Imaging unit low [84.xy]

You may need to order a replacement imaging unit. If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy]

If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy]

You may need to replace the imaging unit very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.

If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Incompatible tray [x] [59]

Try one or more of the following:

- Remove the indicated tray.

- From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the indicated tray.

Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34]

Try one or more of the following:

• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, and then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the printer control panel.
• Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified in Print Properties or the Print dialog settings.
• Check if the paper size is correctly set. For example, if MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, then make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed.
• Check the length and width guides and make sure the paper is loaded properly in the tray.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray.
• Cancel the print job.

Insufficient memory to collate job [37]

Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job.
• Cancel the current print job.

Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation [37]

Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data in the printer memory.
  •Install additional printer memory.

Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37]

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37]

Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory.

Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature [35]

Install additional printer memory or touch Continue to disable Resource Save, clear the message, and continue printing.

Load [paper source] with [custom type name] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

• Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.

Note: If the printer detects a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot detect a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it prints from the default paper source.

- Cancel the current job.

Load [paper source] with [custom string] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

• Load the indicated tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.

Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper source.

- Cancel the current job.

Load [paper source] with [paper size] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

• Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size of paper.
• To use the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.

Note: If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size of paper, then it feeds from that tray or feeder. If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, then it prints from the default paper source.

- Cancel the current job.

Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

• Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.

Note: If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds from that tray or feeder. If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, then it prints from the default paper source.

- Cancel the current job.

Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.
• From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.

Load Manual Feeder with [custom string] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.
• From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.

Load Manual Feeder with [paper size] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

• Load the feeder with the correct size of paper.
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.
• From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.

Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.
• From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.

Maintenance kit low [80.xy]

You may need to order a maintenance kit. For more information, contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative. If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

Maintenance kit nearly low [80.xy]

For more information, contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative. If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

Maintenance kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [80.xy]

You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon. For more information, contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative. If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

Memory full [38]

Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Cancel job to clear the message.
  •Install additional printer memory.

Memory full, cannot print faxes

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message without printing. Held faxes attempt to print after the printer is restarted.

Memory full, cannot send faxes

1 From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and cancel the fax job.
2 Try one or more of the following:
- Reduce the fax resolution, and then resend the fax job.
- Reduce the number of pages in the fax, and then resend the fax job.

Network [x] software error [54]

Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn off the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
• Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, contact customer support.

No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.

Connect the printer to an analog phone line.

Non-Lexmark [supply type], see User's Guide [33.xy]

Note: The supply type can be a toner cartridge or the imaging unit.

The printer has detected a non-Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer.

Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components.

All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or associated components.

Warning—Potential Damage: Use of third-party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty.

To accept any and all of these risks, and to proceed with the use of non-genuine supplies or parts in your printer, press and hold ✗ and # on the printer control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds to clear the message and continue printing.

If you do not wish to accept these risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from your printer, and then install a genuine Lexmark supply or part.

Note: For the list of supported supplies, see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User's Guide or visit www.lexmark.com.

Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52]

Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the flash memory.
  • Install a flash memory card with larger capacity.

Note: Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted.

Paper changes needed

Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt for each page to continue printing.
• Touch Use current supplies to continue printing using the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the current print job.

Parallel port [x] disabled [56]

Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Enable the parallel port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Network/Ports > Parallel [x] > Parallel Buffer > Auto

Note: The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.

Printer had to restart. Last job may be incomplete.

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

For more information, visit http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support.

Remove defective disk [61]

Remove and replace the defective printer hard disk.

Remove paper from standard output bin

Remove the paper stack from the standard bin.

Replace defective imaging unit [31.xy]

Replace the defective imaging unit to clear the message. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.

Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the "Ordering supplies" section of the User's Guide or visit www.lexmark.com.

Replace cartridge, 0 estimated pages remain [88.xy]

Replace the toner cartridge to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.

Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or visit www.lexmark.com.

Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy]

Replace the imaging unit to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.

Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the "Ordering supplies" section of the User's Guide or visit www.lexmark.com.

Replace maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain [80.xy]

Contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative, and then report the message. The printer is scheduled for maintenance.

Replace all originals if restarting job.

Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.

• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan job.

• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.

• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
• Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.

Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge [31.xy]

Try one or more of the following:

- Check if the toner cartridge is missing. If missing, install the toner cartridge.

For information on installing the cartridge, see the "Replacing supplies" section of the User's Guide.

- If the toner cartridge is installed, then remove the unresponsive toner cartridge, and then reinstall it.

Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the cartridge is defective. Replace the toner cartridge.

Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit [31.xy]

Try one or more of the following:

- Check if the imaging unit is missing. If missing, install the imaging unit.

For information on installing the imaging unit, see the "Replacing supplies" section of the User's Guide.

- If the imaging unit is installed, then remove the unresponsive imaging unit, and then reinstall it.

Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the imaging unit is defective. Replace the imaging unit.

Replace unsupported cartridge [32.xy]

Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the "Replacing supplies" section of the User's Guide.

Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or visit www.lexmark.com.

Replace unsupported imaging unit [32.xy]

Remove the imaging unit, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the "Replacing supplies" section of the User's Guide.

Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the "Ordering supplies" section of the User's Guide or visit www.lexmark.com.

Restore held jobs?

Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk.
• From the printer control panel, touch Do not restore if you do not want to restore any of the print jobs.

Scanner automatic feeder cover open

Close the ADF cover.

Scanner disabled by admin [840.01]

Print without the scanner, or contact your system support person.

Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists. [840.02]

Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system support person.
• Touch Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job.

Note: This attempts to enable the scanner.

Scanner jam, remove all originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]

Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.

Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]

Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.

Serial port [x] disabled [56]

Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
  The printer discards any data received through the specified serial port.
  •Make sure Serial Buffer is not set to Disabled.
• From the printer control panel, set Serial Buffer to Auto in the Serial [x] menu.

SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

Some held jobs were not restored

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to delete the indicated job.

Note: Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible.

Standard network software error [54]

Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
• Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, contact customer support.

Standard USB port disabled [56]

Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Enable the USB port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Network/Ports > USB Buffer > Auto

Note: The printer discards any data received through the USB port.

Supply needed to complete job

Do either of the following:

•Install the missing supply to complete the job.
- Cancel the current job.

Too many flash options installed [58]

1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra flash memory.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

Too many trays attached [58]

1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra trays.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

Unformatted flash detected [53]

Try one or more of the following:

- From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.

- Format the flash memory.

Note: If the error message remains, then the flash memory may be defective and needs to be replaced.

Unsupported disk

Remove the unsupported printer hard disk, and then insert a supported one.

Unsupported option in slot [x] [55]

1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer controller board, and then replace it with a supported card.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

USB port [x] disabled [56]

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Notes:

• The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.

Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator.

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

Solving printer problems

• "Basic printer problems" on page 272
• "Option problems" on page 274
  • "Paper feed problems" on page 277

Basic printer problems

The printer is not responding

Action Yes No
Step 1Make sure the printer is turned on.Is the printer turned on?	Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.
Step 2Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode?	Press the Sleep button to wake the printer from Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.	Go to step 3.
Step 3Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and the other to a properly grounded electrical outlet.Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet?	Go to step 4. Plug one end of the power cord into the printer and the other to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Step 4Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet.Does other electrical equipment work?	Unplug the other electrical equipment, and then turn on the printer. If the printer does not work, then reconnect the other electrical equipment.	Go to step 5.
Step 5Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are inserted in the correct ports.Are the cables inserted in the correct ports?	Go to step 6. Make sure to match the following:•The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer•The appropriate Ethernet cable with the Ethernet port
Step 6Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned off by a switch or breaker.Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?	Turn on the switch or reset the breaker.	Go to step 7.
Step 7Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords.Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords?	Connect the printer power cord directly to a properly grounded electrical outlet.	Go to step 8.
Step 8Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the printer and the other to the computer, print server, option, or other network device.Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device?	Go to step 9. Connect the printer cable securely to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device.
Step 9Make sure to install all hardware options properly and remove any packing material.Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material removed?	Go to step 10. Turn off the printer, remove all packing materials, then reinstall the hardware options, and then turn on the printer.
Step 10Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer driver.Are the port settings correct?	Go to step 11. Use correct printer driver settings.
Step 11Check the installed printer driver.Is the correct printer driver installed?	Go to step 12. Install the correct printer driver.
Step 12Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.Is the printer working?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Printer display is blank

Action Yes No
Step 1Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel.Does Ready appear on the printer display?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 2.
Step 2Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.Do Please wait and Ready appear on the printer display?	The problem is solved.	Turn off the printer, and then contact customer support.

Option problems

Cannot detect internal option

Action Yes No
Step 1Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the printer.Does the internal option operate correctly?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 2.
Step 2Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller board.a Turn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.b Make sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate connector in the controller board.c Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board?	Go to step 3. Connect the internal option to the controller board.
Step 3Print a menu settings page, and then check to see if the internal option is listed in the Installed Features list.Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page?	Go to step 4. Reinstall the internal option.
Step 4a Check if the internal option is selected.It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the printer driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating available options in the printer driver” on page 48.b Resend the print job.Does the internal option operate correctly?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Tray problems

Action Yes No
Step 1a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:Check for paper jams or misfeeds.Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.If you are printing on custom-size paper, then make sure that the paper guides rest against the edges of the paper.Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.b Check if the tray closes properly.Is the tray working?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 2.
Step 2a Turn off the printer, then wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.b Resend the print job.Is the tray working?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 3.
Step 3Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer.Print a menu settings page, and then check if the tray is listed in the Installed Features list.Is the tray listed in the menu settings page?	Go to step 4. Reinstall the tray. For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the tray.
Step 4Check if the tray is available in the printer driver.Note: If necessary, manually add the tray in the printer driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating available options in the printer driver” on page 48.Is the tray available in the printer driver?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Cannot detect memory card

Action Yes No
Make sure the memory card is installed.a Install the memory card. For more information, see “Installing a memory card” on page 30.Note:Check if the memory card is securely connected to the printer controller board.b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the card is listed in the Installed Options list.Is the card listed in the Installed Options list?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly

Action Yes No
Step 1Make sure the Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed.a Install the ISP. For more information, see “Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on page 34.b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the ISP is listed in the Installed Features list.Is the ISP listed in the Installed Features list?	Go to step 2. Check if you have a supported ISP.Note: An ISP from another printer may not work on this printer.
Step 2Check the cable and the ISP connection.a Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely connected to the ISP.b Check if the ISP solution interface cable is securely connected into the receptacle of the controller board.Note: The ISP solution interface cable and the receptacle on the controller board are color-coded.Does the Internal Solutions Port operate correctly?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly

Action Yes No
Step 1Make sure the USB or parallel interface card is installed.a Install the USB or parallel interface card. For more information, see “Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on page 34.b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the USB or parallel interface card is listed in the Installed Features list.Is the USB or parallel interface card listed in the Installed Features list?	Go to step 2. Check if you have a supported USB or parallel interface card.Note: A USB or parallel interface card from another printer may not work on this printer.
Step 2Check the cable and the USB or parallel interface card connection.Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely connected to the USB or parallel interface card.Does the USB or parallel interface card operate correctly?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Paper feed problems

Paper frequently jams

Action Yes No
Step 1a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and type.b Insert the tray properly.If jam recovery is enabled, then the print jobs will reprint automatically.Do paper jams still occur frequently?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2a Load paper from a fresh package.Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.b Resend the print job.Do paper jams still occur frequently?	Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
Step 3a Review the tips on avoiding jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 237.b Follow the recommendations, and then resend the print job.Do paper jams still occur frequently?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared

Action Yes No
Check the entire paper path for jammed paper.a Remove any jammed paper.b From the printer control panel, touchContinueto clear the message.Does the paper jam message remain?	Contactcustomersupport.	The problem is solved.

Jammed pages are not reprinted

Action Yes No
Turn on Jam Recovery.a From the home screen, navigate to: [IMAGE] > Settings > General Settings > Print Recoveryb From the Jam Recovery menu, touch the arrows to scroll to On or Auto.c Touch Submit.Do pages reprint after a jam?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Solving print problems

Printing problems

Multiple-language PDF files do not print

Action Yes No
Step 1a Check if the print options for the PDF output are set to embed all fonts.For more information, see the documentation that came with Adobe Acrobat.b Generate a new PDF file, and then resend the print job.Do the files print?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 2.
Step 2a Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.b Click File > Print > Advanced > Print As Image > OK > OK.Do the files print?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Error message about reading the flash drive appears

Action Yes No
Step 1Check if the flash drive is inserted into the front USB port.Note: The flash drive will not work if it is inserted into the rear USB port.Is the flash drive inserted into the front USB port?	Go to step 2. Insert the	flash driveinto the front USB port.
Step 2Check if the indicator light on the printer control panel is blinking green.Note: A green blinking light indicates that the printer is busy.Is the indicator light blinking green?	Wait until the printer is ready, then view the held jobs list, and then print the documents.	Go to step 3.
Step 3a Check for an error message on the display.b Clear the message.Does the error message still appear?	Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4Check if the flash drive is supported.For more information on tested and approved USB flash drives, see “Supported flash drives and file types” on page 85.Does the error message still appear?	Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5Check if the USB port is disabled by the system support person.Does the error message still appear?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Print jobs do not print

Action Yes No
Step 1a From the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog and check if you have selected the correct printer.Note: If the printer is not the default printer, then you must select the printer for each document that you want to print.b Resend the print job.Do the jobs print?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 2.
Step 2a Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears on the printer display.b Resend the print job.Do the jobs print?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 3.
Step 3If an error message appears on the printer display, then clear the message.Note: The printer continues to print after clearing the message.Do the jobs print?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 4.
Step 4a Check if the ports (USB, serial, or Ethernet) are working and if the cables are securely connected to the computer and the printer.Note: For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.b Resend the print job.Do the jobs print?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 5.
Step 5a Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.b Resend the print job.Do the jobs print?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 6.
Step 6a Remove, and then reinstall the printer software. For more information, see “Installing the printer software” on page 48.Note: The printer software is available athttp://support.lexmark.com.b Resend the print job.Do the jobs print?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Confidential and other held jobs do not print

Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs.

Action Yes No
Step 1Open the held jobs folder on the printer display, and then verify that your print job is listed.Is your print job listed in the held jobs folder?	Go to step 2. Select one	of the Print and Hold options, and then resend the print job. For more information, see “Printing confidential and other held jobs” on page 87.
Step 2The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.•Delete the print job, and then send it again.•For PDF files, generate a new PDF, and then print it again.If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one.For Windows usersa Open the Print Properties folder.b From the Print and Hold dialog, select the “Keep duplicate documents” check box.c Enter a PIN number.For Macintosh usersSave each print job, name each job differently, and then send the individual jobs to the printer.Does the job print?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 3.
Step 3Free up additional printer memory by deleting some of the held jobs.Does the job print?	The problem is solved.	Add additional printer memory.

Print job takes longer than expected

Act 'es No
Ste [K4Z4]Cha the environmental settings of the printer.a I [TS32] the printer control panel, navigate to:[S3XK] > Settings > General Settingsb Select Eco-Mode or Quiet Mode, and then select Off.Note: Disabling Eco-Mode or Quiet Mode may increase the consumption of energy or supplies, or both.Did the job print?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 2.
Step 2Rec the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the print job, and then resend the jobDid job print?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 3.
Ste a I ove held jobs stored in the printer memory.b I nd the print job.Did job print?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 4.
Ste a I ole the Page Protect feature.[278Y]n the printer control panel, navigate to: >Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect >Offb I [KKKW]nd the print job.Did job print?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 5.
Step 5a Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure. For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.b I [CASD]nd the print job.Did the job print?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 6.
Ste Install additional printer memory, and then resend the print job.Did job print?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
p 1
p 1
p 1
p 1
p 1
p 1
p 1
p 1
p 1
p 1
p 1
p 1
ep 1
p 1
p 1
p 1
p 1

Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper

Action Yes No
Step 1a Check if you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray.b Resend the print job.Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 2.
Step 2a From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper size and type to match the paper loaded in the tray.b Resend the print job.Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 3.
Step 3a Depending on your operating system, open Printing Preferences or the Print dialog, and then specify the paper type.b Resend the print job.Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 4.
Step 4a Check if the trays are not linked.b Resend the print job.Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Incorrect characters print

Action Yes No
Step 1Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode.Note: If Ready Hex appears on the printer display, then turn off the printer, and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace mode.Is the printer in Hex Trace mode?	Deactivate Hex Trace mode.	Go to step 2.
Step 2a From the printer control panel, select Standard Network or Network [x], and then set SmartSwitch to On.b Resend the print job.Do incorrect characters print?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Tray linking does not work

Notes:

•The trays can detect paper length.
- The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper Size/Type menu.

Action Yes No
Step 1a Open the trays, and then check if they contain paper of the same size and type.•Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded in each tray.•Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.b Resend the print job.Do the trays link correctly?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 2.
Step 2a From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be linked.Note: The paper size and type must match for trays to be linked.b Resend the print job.Do the trays link correctly?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Large jobs do not collate

Action Yes No
Step 1a From the Finishing menu on the printer control panel, set Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3).b Resend the print job.Did the job print and collate correctly?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 2.
Step 2a From the printer software, set Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3).Note: Setting Collate to (1,1,1) (2,2,2) in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.b Resend the print job.Did the job print and collate correctly?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 3.
Step 3Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the job.Did the job print and collate correctly?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Unexpected page breaks occur

Action Yes No
Increase the printing timeout.aFrom the home screen, navigate to:[0C30]>Settings>General Settings>Timeoutsb Increase the Print Timeout setting, and then touchSubmit.c Resend the print job.Did the file print correctly?	The problem is solved.	Check the original file for manual page breaks.

Print quality problems

Characters have jagged or uneven edges

ABC DEF

Action Yes No
Step 2a Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that you want to use on your computer. For more information, contact your system support person.b Resend the print job.Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven edges?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Printer is printing blank pages

Blank white document page with a small corner detail (no text or symbols)

Action Yes No
Step 1a Check if there is packing material left on the imaging unit.1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.2 Check if the packing material is properly removed from the imaging unit.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.b Resend the print job.Is the printer still printing blank pages?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.b Resend the print job.Is the printer still printing blank pages?	Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
Step 3Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.Is the printer still printing blank pages?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Clipped pages or images

ABCD ABCD ABCD

Leading edge Trailing edge

Action Yes No
Step 1a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper loaded.b Resend the print job.Is the page or image clipped?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.Do the paper size and type match the paper loaded in the tray?	Go to step 3. Do one or more of the following:Specify the paper size from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper size specified in the tray settings.
Step 3a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.b Resend the print job.Is the page or image clipped?	Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4a Reinstall the imaging unit.1 Remove the toner cartridge.2 Remove the imaging unit.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.3 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.b Resend the print job.Is the page or image clipped?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Prints on color transparencies appear dark when projected

Note: This problem occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors. To obtain the highest projected color quality, transmissive overhead projectors are recommended.

Action Yes No
Step 1From the printer control panel, make sure the paper type setting is set to Transparency.Is the paper type setting correct?	Go to step 2. Set the paper type to Transparency.
Step 2Reduce the toner darkness, and then resend the print job.Does the print on the color transparency look lighter?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 3.
Step 3Make sure you are using a recommended type of color transparency, and then resend the print job.Does the print on the color transparency look lighter?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Shadow images appear on prints

Action Yes No
Step 1Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray.Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray?	Go to step 2. Load paper	with the correct paper type and weight in the tray.
Step 2From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.Is the tray set to the type and weight of the paper loaded?	Go to step 3. Change the paper	loaded in the tray to match the paper type and weight specified in the tray settings.
Step 3a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.b Resend the print job.Do shadow images still appear on prints?	Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.Do shadow images still appear on prints?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Gray background on prints

Action Yes No
Step 1Check if Allow Background Removal is set to Off.aFrom the General Settings menu, set Allow Background Removal to On.bResend the print job.Did the background disappear from the prints?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 2.
Step 2Adjust the toner darkness to a lighter setting.aFrom the Quality Menu, select a lower value to reduce toner density.•4 is the factory default setting.•If Print Mode is set to Black Only, then a setting of 5 increases toner density and darkness for all print jobs.bResend the print job.Did the background disappear from the prints?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 3.
Step 3Reinstall the toner cartridge.aRemove the cartridge.bInstall the cartridge.cResend the print job.Did the background disappear from the prints?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 4.
Step 4Check if off-white background is selected.aDepending on your operating system, set off-white background from Print Properties or the Print dialog.bResend the print job.Did the background disappear from the prints?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Incorrect margins on prints

ABCD ABCD ABCD

Action Yes No
Step 1a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.b Resend the print job.Are the margins correct?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 2.
Step 2From the printer control panel, set the paper size in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray?	Go to step 3. Do one or more of the following:Specify the paper size from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper size specified in the tray settings.
Step 3a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.b Resend the print job.Are the margins correct?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Paper curl

Action Yes No
Step 1Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded.Are the width and length guides positioned correctly?	Go to step 2. Adjust the	width and length guides.
Step 2From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in the tray?	Go to step 3. Specify the	paper type and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Step 3a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.b Resend the print job.Is the paper still curled?	Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4a Remove the paper from the tray, and then turn it over.b Resend the print job.Is the paper still curled?	Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5a Load paper from a fresh package.Note:Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.b Resend the print job.Is the paper still curled?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Print irregularities

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

Leading edge Trailing edge

Action Yes No
Step 1a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded in the tray.b Resend the print job.Do print irregularities still appear?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.Do the printer settings match the type and weight of the paper loaded in the tray?	Go to step 3. Specify the paper size and type from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Step 3a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.b Resend the print job.Do print irregularities still appear?	Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.Are you printing on textured or rough paper?	From the printer control panel, set the paper texture in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.	Go to step 5.
Step 5a Load paper from a fresh package.Note:Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.b Resend the print job.Do print irregularities still appear?	Go to step 6. The problem is solved.
Step 6Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.Do print irregularities still appear?	Contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative.	The problem is solved.

Repeating defects appear on prints

Two document icons with placeholder text, no actual text or symbols present

Action Yes No
Step 1Measure the distance between the defects.Check for a distance between the defects that equals:97 mm (3.82 in.)47 mm (1.85 in.)38 mm (1.5 in.)Is the distance between defects equal to one of the listed measurements?	Go to step 2.	1 Check if the distance between the defects equal to 80 mm (3.15 in.)2 Take note of the distance, and then contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative.
Step 2Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.Do the repeating defects still appear?	Contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative.	The problem is solved.

Print is too dark

ABC DEF

Action Yes No
Step 1a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, reduce the toner darkness.Note: 8 is the factory default setting.b Resend the print job.Is the print still too dark?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2a From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.b Resend the print job.Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?	Go to step 3. Do one or	more of the following:Specify the papertype, texture, and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the papertype, texture and weight specified in the tray settings.
Step 3a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.b Resend the print job.Is the print still too dark?	Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.Are you printing on textured or rough paper?	From the printer control panel, changethe texture settings in the Paper Texture menu to match the paper you are printing on.	Go to step 5.
Step 5a Load paper from a fresh package.Note:Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.b Resend the print job.Is the print still too dark?	Go to step 6. The problem is solved.
Step 6Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.Is the print still too dark?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Print is too light

ABC DEF

Action Yes No
Step 1a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, increase the toner darkness.Note: 8 is the factory default setting.b Resend the print job.Is the print still too light?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?	Go to step 3. Change the paper type, texture, and weight to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Step 3a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture, and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.b Resend the print job.Is the print still too light?	Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes.Are you printing on textured or rough paper?	From the printer control panel, change the texture settings in the Paper Texture menu to match the paper you are printing on.	Go to step 5.
Step 5a Load paper from a fresh package.Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.b Resend the print job.Is the print still too light?	Go to step 6. The problem is solved.
Step 6a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.3 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.b Resend the print job.Is the print still too light?	Go to step 7. The problem is solved.
Step 7Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.Is the print still too light?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Skewed print

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

Action Yes No
Step 1a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded.b Resend the print job.Is the print still skewed?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2a Check if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the tray.b Resend the print job.Is the print still skewed?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Printer is printing solid black pages

Solid black document page with a white corner (no text or symbols)

Action Yes No
Step 1a Reinstall the imaging unit.1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.2 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.b Resend the print job.Is the printer printing solid black pages?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.Is the printer printing solid black pages?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Transparency print quality is poor

Action Yes No
Step 1From the printer control panel, set the paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency?	Go to step 2. Set the paper type to Transparency.
Step 2a Check if you are using a recommended type of transparency.b Resend the print job.Is the print quality still poor?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

Action Yes No
Step 1a Depending on your operating system, specify the tray or feeder from Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.b Resend the print job.Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in the tray?	Go to step 3. Change the paper type and weight to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Step 3a Load paper from a fresh package.Note:Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.b Resend the print job.Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?	Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4a Reinstall the imaging unit.1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.Warning—Potential Damage:Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.2 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.b Resend the print job.Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?	Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Streaked vertical lines appear on prints

Action Yes No
Step 1a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture, and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.b Resend the print job.Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2From the printer control panel, set the paper texture, type, and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.Do the paper texture, type, and weight match the paper in the tray?	Go to step 3. Do one or more of the following:Specify the paper texture, type, and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper texture, type, and weight specified in the tray settings.
Step 3a Load paper from a fresh package.Note:Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.b Resend the print job.Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?	Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4a Reinstall the imaging unit.1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.Warning—Potential Damage:Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.2 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.b Resend the print job.Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?	Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?	Contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative.	The problem is solved.

Horizontal voids appear on prints

Leading edge Trailing edge

Action Yes No
Step 1a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.b Resend the print job.Do horizontal voids appear on prints?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.b Resend the print job.Do horizontal voids appear on prints?	Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
Step 3a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.b Resend the print job.Do horizontal voids appear on prints?	Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.Do horizontal voids appear on prints?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Vertical voids appear on prints

Leading edge Trailing edge

Action Yes No
Step 1a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.b Resend the print job.Do vertical voids appear on prints?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2a From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.b Resend the print job.Do vertical voids appear on prints?	Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
Step 3Check if you are using a recommended type of paper.a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.b Resend the print job.Do vertical voids appear on prints?	Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.b Resend the print job.Do vertical voids appear on prints?	Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.Do vertical voids appear on prints?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Toner specks appear on prints

Action Yes No
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.Do toner specks appear on prints?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Toner fog or background shading appears on prints

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

Action Yes No
Step 1Reinstall the imaging unit.a Remove, and then install the imaging unit.b Resend the print job.Does fog or shading appear on prints?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.Does fog or shading appear on prints?	Contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative.	The problem is solved.

Toner rubs off

ABC DEF Leading edge Trailing edge

Action Yes No
Step 1From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the paper type and weight.Do the paper type and texture match the paper loaded in the tray?	Go to step 2. Specify the paper type and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Step 2Check if you are printing on paper with texture or rough finishes.Are you printing on textured or rough paper?	From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper texture.	Contact customer support.

Uneven print density

ABCDE ABCDE

Action Yes No
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.Is the print density uneven?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Solving copy problems

•“Copier does not respond” on page 305
- "Scanner unit does not close" on page 305
• "Poor copy quality" on page 305
- "Partial document or photo copies" on page 307

Copier does not respond

Action Yes No
Step 1Check if an error or status message appears on the display.Does an error or status message appear?	Clear the error or status message.	Go to step 2.
Step 2Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet?	Go to step 3. Connect the power cord to the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Step 3Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it back on.Did Performing Self Test and Ready appear?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Scanner unit does not close

Action Yes No
Check if there are no obstructions between the scanner unit and the printer.a Lift the scanner unit.b Remove any obstruction that keeps the scanner unit open.c Lower the scanner unit.Did the scanner unit close properly?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Poor copy quality

Action Yes No
Step 1Check if an error or status message appears on the display.Does an error or status message appear?	Clear the error or status message.	Go to step 2.
Step 2Check the quality of the original document.Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?	Go to step 3. Increase the scanresolution setting for a higher-quality output.
Step 3If dark marks appear on prints, then clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water.Is the scanner glass clean?	Go to step 4. See “Cleaning the scanner glass” on page 222.
Step 4Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.a From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco-Mode settings.b From the Copy menu, adjust the toner darkness.c If the print remains faded, then replace the toner cartridge.Is the print quality satisfactory?	Go to step 5. See “Print quality problems” on page 285.
Step 5Check the placement of the document or photo.Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.Is the document or photo loaded correctly?	Go to step 6. Place the document or photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Step 6Increase the scan resolution setting for a higher-quality output.Did the increased resolution produce a higher-quality output?	The problem is solved. Go to step 7.
Step 7Check the copy settings.From the Copy screen, check if the Content Type and Content Source settings are correct for the document being scanned.Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the document being scanned?	Go to step 8. Change the Content Type and Content Source settings to match the document being scanned.
Step 8Check for patterns on print.a From the Copy screen, navigate to:Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > select a lower settingb On the Copy screen, make sure no scaling is being selected.Do patterns appear on prints?	Go to step 9. The problem is solved.
Step 9Check for missing or faded text on prints.a From the Copy screen, navigate to: Advanced Options > Advanced Imagingb Adjust the settings:· Improve sharpness—Increase the sharpness setting.· Remove background—Reduce the current background removal setting.· Increase contrast—Increase the current setting.· Decrease shadow—Reduce the current setting.Do prints have missing or faded text?	Go to step 10. The problem is solved.
Step 10Check for washed-out or overexposed output.a From the Copy screen, navigate to: Advanced Options > Advanced Imagingb Adjust the settings of the following:· Background removal—Reduce the current setting.· Shadow detail—Reduce the current background removal setting.c Resend the copy job.Do pages show washed-out or overexposed prints?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Partial document or photo copies

Action Yes No
Step 1Check the placement of the document or photo.Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.Is the document or photo loaded correctly?	Go to step 2. Place the document or photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Step 2Check if the paper size setting matches the size of the paper loaded in the tray.From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting.Does the paper size setting match the size of the paper loaded in the tray.	Go to step 3. Change the paper size setting to match the paper loaded in the tray, or load the tray with paper that matches the paper size setting.
Step 3a Specify the paper size. Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size in Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.b Resend the print job.Do copies print properly?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Solving fax problems

• "Fax and e-mail functions are not set up" on page 308
• "Caller ID is not shown" on page 309
• "Cannot send or receive a fax" on page 309
• "Can send but not receive faxes" on page 311
• "Can receive but not send faxes" on page 312
• "Received fax has poor print quality" on page 313

Fax and e-mail functions are not set up

Notes:

• Before you troubleshoot, check if the fax cables are connected.
• The indicator light is blinking red until you set up fax and e-mail.

Action Yes No
a From the home screen, navigate to: > Settings > General Settings > Run initial setup > Yes > Submitb Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.The “Select your language” screen appears on the printer display.Are fax and e-mail functions set up?	The problem is solved. Contact customer support.

Caller ID is not shown

Action Yes No
Contact your telephone company to check if your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service.Notes:If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, then you may have to change the default setting. There are two settings available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2).The availability of these settings in the Fax menu depends on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns.Contact your telephone company to determine which pattern or switch setting to use.Does the caller ID appear?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Cannot send or receive a fax

Action Yes No
Step 1Check if an error or status message appears on the display.Is there an error or status message on the display?	Clear the error or status message.	Go to step 2.
Step 2Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet?	Go to step 3. Connect the power cord to the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Step 3Check the power.Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears on the display.Is the printer turned on, and does Ready appear on the display?	Go to step 4. Turn on the printer,and then wait until Ready appears on the display.
Step 4Check the printer connections.If applicable, check if the cable connections for the following equipment are secure:TelephoneHandsetAnswering machineAre the cable connections secure?	Go to step 5. Securely connect the cables.
Step 5a Check the telephone wall jack.1 Plug the telephone cable into the wall jack.2 Listen for a dial tone.3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone cable into the wall jack.4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug the telephone cable into a different wall jack.5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.b Try sending or receiving a fax.Can you send or receive a fax?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 6.
Step 6Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or the correct digital connector.The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used.If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port) on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN provider.If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use. For more information, contact your DSL provider.If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX. If none exists, then consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.Is the printer connected to an analog phone service or the correct digital connector?	Go to step 7. Connect the printer to an analog phone service or the correct digital connector.
Step 7Check for a dial tone.Did you hear a dial tone?	Go to step 8.	Try calling the fax number to make sure that it is working properly.If the telephone line is being used by another device, then wait until the other device is finished before sending a fax.If you are using the On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the volume to check if you hear a dial tone.
Step 8Temporarily disconnect other equipment (such as answering machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters) between the printer and the telephone line, and then try sending or receiving a fax.Can you send or receive a fax?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 9.
Step 9a Temporarily disable call waiting. Contact your telephone company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling call waiting.b Try sending or receiving a fax.Can you send or receive a fax?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 10.
Step 10a Temporarily disable voice mail service. For more information, contact your telephone company.Note: If you want to use both voice mail and the printer, then consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.b Try sending or receiving a fax.Can you send or receive a fax?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 11.
Step 11Scan the original document one page at a time.a Dial the fax number.b Scan the document one page at a time.Can you send or receive a fax?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Can send but not receive faxes

Action Yes No
Step 1Check the tray or feeder.If empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.Can you receive faxes?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 2.
Step 2Check the ring count delay settings.a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.Notes:View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.b Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.c In the “Rings to Answer” field, enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before the printer answers.d Click Submit.Can you receive faxes?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 3.
Step 3Replace the toner cartridge. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.Can you receive faxes?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Can receive but not send faxes

Action Yes No
Step 1Check if the printer is in Fax mode.From the home screen, touchFaxto put the printer in Fax mode, and then send the fax.Note:The Multi Send application does not support the XPS output type. To use XPS, use the regular faxing method.Can you send faxes?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 2.
Step 2Load the original document properly.Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.Note:Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.Can you send faxes?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 3.
Step 3Set up the shortcut number properly.Check if the shortcut number has been set for the telephone number that you want to dial.Dial the telephone number manually.Can you send faxes?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Received fax has poor print quality

Action Yes No
Step 1Ask the person who sent you the fax to:a Check if the quality of the original document is satisfactory.b Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.c Resend the fax.Is the fax print quality satisfactory?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 2.
Step 2Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed.a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.Notes:View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and then locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.b Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.c In the Max Speed menu, click one of the following:2400480096001440033600d Click Submit, and then resend the fax.Is the fax print quality satisfactory?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 3.
Step 3Replace the toner cartridge.When Cartridge low [88.xy] appears, replace the cartridge, and then resend the fax.Is the fax print quality satisfactory?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Solving scanner problems

• "The scanner does not respond" on page 314
- "Scan job was not successful" on page 315
- "Scanner unit does not close" on page 316
- "Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer" on page 316
• "Poor scanned image quality" on page 317
- "Partial document or photo scans" on page 318
- "Cannot scan from a computer" on page 318

The scanner does not respond

Action Yes No
Step 1Check if the printer is turned on.Is the printer turned on?	Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.
Step 2Check if the printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device.Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device?	Go to step 3. Connect the printercable securely to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device.
Step 3Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet?	Go to step 4. Connect the powercord to the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Step 4Check if the electrical outlet is turned off by a switch or breaker.Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?	Turn on the switch or reset the breaker.	Go to step 5.
Step 5Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords.Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords?	Connect the printer power cord directly to a properly grounded electrical outlet.	Go to step 6.
Step 6Check other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet.Are the other electrical equipment working?	Unplug the other electrical equipment and turn on the printer.If the printer does not work, then reconnect the other electrical equipment and then go to step 6.	Go to step 7.
Step 7Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.Are the printer and scanner working?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Scan job was not successful

Action Yes No
Step 1Check the cable connections.Make sure the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.Are the cables securely connected?	Go to step 2. Connect the cables properly.
Step 2Check if the file name is already in use.Is the file name already in use?	Change the file name. Go to step 3.
Step 3Check if the document or photo you want to scan is open in another application or being used by another user.Is the file you want to scan open in another application or being used by another user?	Close the file you are scanning.	Go to step 4.
Step 4Check if either the Append time stamp or the Overwrite existing file check box is selected in the destination configuration settings.Is the Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box selected in the destination configuration settings?	Go to step 5. Select the	Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box in the destination configuration settings.
Step 5From the Flash Drive menu, reduce the scan resolution settings, and then resend the scan job.Does the job scan?	The problem is solved.	Go to step 6.
Step 6Check the scan settings.From the Scan screen, make sure the Content Type and Content Source settings are correct for the document being scanned.Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the document being scanned?	The problem is solved.	Change the Content Type and Content Source settings to match the document being scanned.

Scanner unit does not close

Action Yes No
Check if there are obstructions in the scanner unit.a Lift the scanner unit.b Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.c Lower the scanner unit.Did the scanner unit close correctly?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer

Action Yes No
Step 1Check if other applications are interfering with the scan.Close all applications that are not being used.Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?	Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2Select a lower scan resolution.Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?	Contact customer support.	The problem is solved.

Poor scanned image quality

Action Yes No
Step 1Check if an error message appears on the display.Is there an error message on the printer display?	Clear the error message.	Go to step 2.
Step 2Check the quality of the original document.Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?	Go to step 3. Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher-quality output.
Step 3Clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water.Is the scanner glass clean?	Go to step 4. See “Cleaning the scanner glass” on page 222.
Step 4Check the placement of the document or photo.Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.Is the document or photo loaded correctly?	Go to step 5. Place the document or photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Step 5Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.• From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco-Mode settings.•From the Copy menu, adjust the toner darkness.•When the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.Is the print quality satisfactory?	Go to step 6. See “Print quality problems” on page 285.
Step 6Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher-quality output.Did the increased resolution produce a higher-quality output?	Problem solved. Go to step 7.
Step 7Check the scan settings.From the Scan screen, make sure the Content Type and Content Source settings are correct for the document being scanned.Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the document being scanned?	Contact customer support.	Change the Content Type and Content Source settings to match the document being scanned.

Partial document or photo scans

Action Yes No
Check the placement of the document or photo.Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.Is the document or photo loaded correctly?	Contact customer support.	Load the document or photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

Cannot scan from a computer

Action Yes No
Step 1Make sure the printer is turned on and that Ready appears on the printer display before scanning a job.Does Ready appear before scanning the job?	Go to step 3. Go to step 2.
Step 2Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.Is there an error message on the printer display?	Clear the error message.	Go to step 3.
Step 3Check the cable connections between the printer and the print server to make sure they are secure.For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.Are the cable connections between the printer and the print server secure?	Contact customer support.	Tighten the cable connections.

Solving home screen applications problems

An application error has occurred

Action Yes No
Step 1Check the system log for relevant details.a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:•View the IP address on the printer home screen.• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages, and then locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.b Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > System tab > Log.c From the Filter menu, select an application status.d From the Application menu, select an application, and then click Submit.Does an error message appear in the log?	Go to step 2. Contact	customersupport.
Step 2Resolve the error.Is the application working now?	The problem is solved.	Contact customersupport.

Embedded Web Server does not open

Action Yes No
Step 1Make sure the printer IP address is correct.View the printer IP address:From the printer home screenFrom the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menuBy printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP sectionNote: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.Is the printer IP address correct?	Go to step 2. Type the correct	printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.Note: Depending on the network settings, you may need to type "https://" instead of "http://" before the printer IP address to access the Embedded Web Server.
Step 2Check if the printer is turned on.Is the printer turned on?	Go to step 3. Turn on the printer.
Step 3Check if the network connection is working.Is the network connection working?	Go to step 4. Contact your system support person.
Step 4Make sure the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure.For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.Are the cable connections to the printer and print server secure?	Go to step 5. Tighten the cable connection.
Step 5Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers.Note: Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server.Are the Web proxy servers disabled?	Go to step 6. Contact your system support person.
Step 6Access the Embedded Web Server again by typing the correct IP address in the address field.Did the Embedded Web Server open?	The problem is solved.	Contact customer support.

Contacting customer support

When you contact customer support, you will need to be able to describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the printer display, and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.

You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label at the back of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.

Lexmark has various ways to help you solve your printing problem. Visit the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com, and then select one of the following:

Tech Library	You can browse our library of manuals, support documentation, drivers, and other downloads to help you solve common problems.
E-mail	You can send an e-mail to the Lexmark team, describing your problem. A service representative will respond and provide you with information to solve your problem.
Live chat	You can chat directly with a service representative. They can work with you to solve your printer problem or provide assistance through Assisted Service where the service representative can remotely connect to your computer through the Internet to troubleshoot problems, install updates, or complete other tasks to help you successfully use your Lexmark product.

Telephone support is also available. In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-539-6275. For other countries or regions, visit http://support.lexmark.com.

Notices

Product information

Product name:

Lexmark MX610de, MX611de, and MX611dhe

Machine type:

7016

Model(s):

630, 670, 675, 679

Edition notice

October 2012

The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time.

References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user's responsibility.

For Lexmark technical support, visit http://support.lexmark.com.

For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.

© 2009 Lexmark International, Inc.

All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT END USERS

The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.

Trademarks

Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in the United States and/or other countries.

Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company's designation of a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

The FCC Class B limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

•Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult your point of purchase or service representative for additional suggestions.

The manufacturer is not responsible for radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class B computing device, use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations.

Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to:

Director of Lexmark Technology & Services

Lexmark International, Inc.

740 West New Circle Road

Lexington, KY 40550

[phone]

Noise emission levels

The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.

Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing 55 dBA
Scanning 45 dBA
Copying 56 dBA
Ready N/A dBA

Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Temperature information

Ambient operating temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Shipping temperature -40 to 43.3°C (-40 to 110°F)
Storage temperature and relative humidity 1 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)	8 to 80% RH

Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive

Prohibition sign with red X symbol crossed over a trash bin, indicating no waste or disposal restriction

The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.

If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your local sales office phone number.

Product disposal

Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local authorities for disposal and recycling options.

Static sensitivity notice

This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the metal frame of the printer.

ENERGY STAR

Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.

Laser notice

The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J for Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.

Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655-675 nanometers. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.

Laser advisory label

A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:

DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.

Product power consumption

The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.

Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

Mode Description Power consumption (Watts)
Printing	The product is generating hard-copy output from electronic inputs.	640 W
Copy	The product is generating hard-copy output from hard-copy original documents.	660 W
Scan The product is scanning hard-copy documents. 40 W
Ready The product is waiting for a print job. 20 W
Sleep Mode	The product is in a high-level energy-saving mode.	7 W
Hibernate	The product is in a low-level energy-saving mode.	0.5 W
Off The product is plugged into an electrical outlet, but the power switch is turned off.		0 W

The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average.

Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Sleep Mode

This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.

Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes):

30 minutes

By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 180 minutes. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of the product. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.

Hibernate Mode

This product is designed with an ultra-low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in Hibernate Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.

The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:

•Using the Hibernate Timeout
•Using the Schedule Power modes
•Using the Sleep/Hibernate button

Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions except for EU countries and Switzerland	Disabled
Factory default value for this product in EU countries or regions and Switzerland 3 days

The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified between one hour and one month.

Off mode

If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.

Total energy usage

It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.

Industry Canada compliance statement

This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard ICES-003.

All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the installation software CD.

European Community (EC) directives conformity

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and the ecodesign of energy-related products.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA. The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.

This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.

Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment

This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal equipment such as facsimile.

Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone company.

This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.

A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises' wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your setup documentation for more information.

The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is shown separately on the label.

If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.

The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.

If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc. at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.

This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.

Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information.

If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.

Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges.

The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)

See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.

Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network

This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.

Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges.

This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.

Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network

The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services.

This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.

This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.

This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers.

Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance to Telecom's specifications:

• There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation, and
• The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next call attempt.
• The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.

Using this product in Switzerland

This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 80D1877) to be installed on any line which receives metering pulses in Switzerland. The filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines in Switzerland.

Notice to Users in the European Union

Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy-related products.

Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

CE

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA. The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.

This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.

Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information.

Regulatory notices for wireless products

This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters, for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.

Modular component notice

Wireless-equipped models contain the following modular component(s):

Lexmark Regulatory Type Model Number LEX-M01-005; FCC ID:IYLLEXM01005; IC:2376A-M01005

Exposure to radio frequency radiation

The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.

Notice to users in Brazil

Industry Canada (Canada)

This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada.

To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing.

The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.

The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

Industry Canada (Canada)

Taiwan NCC RF notice statement

NCC型式認證設備注意事項

台灣低功率射頻電機設備之使用注意事項

Notice to users in the European Union

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy-related products.

Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

CE

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA. The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.

This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.

Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy-related products.

Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

CE!

Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA. The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.

This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.

AT BE BG CH	CY CZ DE DK	EE
EL ES FI FR HR	HU IE IS IT
LI	LT	LU	LV	MT	NL	NO	PL	PT
RO	SE SI SK TR	UK

Česky	Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk	Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch	Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
Ελληνική	ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η ΣΧΜΑΡΚ ΙΝΤΕΝΑΤΙΟΛ, ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
English	Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español	Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Eesti Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.
Suomi Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.
Français	Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Magyar Alulrott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb előírásainak.
Íslenska	Hér meõ lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því aõ þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aôrar kröfur, sem gerõar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Italiano	Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski	Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lietuvių	Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.
Malti	Bil-preženti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.
Nederlands	Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk	Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Polski	Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português	A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovensky	Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Slovensko	Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska	Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

Patent acknowledgment

The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher Suites for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.

The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA-256/382 and AES Galois Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.

The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.

The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.

The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS implemented in the product or service.

The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.

The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the product or service.

The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 (IKEv1) implemented in the product or service.

STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS, LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS

Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY

This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the country-specific warranty information that came with your product.

This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”

Limited warranty

Lexmark warrants that this product:

—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts

—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship

If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement (at Lexmark's option).

If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the product.

If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user.

Limited warranty service

The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser Units, Transfer/Transport Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance” message for such item.

To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location. You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.

When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.

The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.

Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions, liens, and encumbrances.

As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized use of genuine Lexmark products will not be impacted.

Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).

For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web.

Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.

Extent of limited warranty

Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints produced by any product.

Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:

—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user's guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark

TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES, AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.

Limitation of liability

Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.

Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim.

This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation.

Additional rights

Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.

This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.

Index

Numerics

250-sheet tray installing 45

550-sheet tray installing 45

Symbols

[x]-page jam, remove all pages from the finisher's accumulator. Leave paper in bin. [45y.xx] 253

[x]-page jam, clear manual feeder.

[25y.xx] 246

[x]-page jam, clear standard bin.

[20y.xx] 240

[x]-page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 239

[x]-page jam, open front door. [20y.xx] 242

[x]-page jam, open rear door.

[20y.xx] 240

[x]-page jam, open tray [x].

[24y.xx] 247

[x]-page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [23y.xx] 245

A

accessing the Embedded Web Server 21

Active NIC menu 151

adapter plug 117

ADF

copying using 90

ADF separator roller ordering 225

adjusting brightness

Embedded Web Server 215

printer control panel 215

adjusting copy quality 95

adjusting display brightness 215

adjusting Sleep mode 213

adjusting toner darkness 83

administrator settings

Embedded Web Server 234

advanced options

fax 130

FTP 101

FTP options 138

advanced options, touch-screen e-mail 108

answering machine setting up 110

AppleTalk menu 156

applications

understanding 22

attaching cables 49

available internal options 28

avoiding jams 78

avoiding paper jams 237

B

blocking junk faxes 127

buttons, printer control panel 15

buttons, touch screen using 18

C

cables

Ethernet 49

USB 49

canceling

print job, from computer 88

canceling a print job

from a computer 88

from the printer control panel 88

canceling an e-mail 106

cannot open Embedded Web

Server 319

Card Copy

setting up 23

card stock

loading, multipurpose feeder 65 tips 75

Cartridge low [88.xy] 257

Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 258

Cartridge very low, [x] estimated pages remain [88.xy] 258

Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch [41.xy] 257

Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation] 258

Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation] 258

Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation] 258

Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load

[orientation] 258

Check tray [x] connection 259

checking an unresponsive printer 272

checking status of parts and supplies 223

checking the status of parts and supplies 223

checking the virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 234

cleaning

exterior of the printer 221

scanner glass 222

cleaning the printer 221

Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job

[2yy.xx] 259

color quality troubleshooting prints on color transparencies appear dark when projected 288

Complex page, some data may not have printed [39] 259

confidential data

information on securing 220

confidential jobs

modifying print settings 87

confidential print jobs 86

printing from a Macintosh computer 87

printing from Windows 87

Confidential Print menu 162

Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57] 260

configuration information wireless network 53

Configure MP menu 144

configuring

supply notifications, imaging unit 235

supply notifications, maintenance kit 235

supply notifications, toner cartridge 235

configuring e-mail settings 102

configuring port settings 56

configuring supply notifications 235

connecting printer to distinctive ring service 121

connecting to a wireless network using PIN (Personal Identification Number) method 54

using Push Button Configuration method 54

using the Embedded Web Server 55

using wireless setup wizard 54

conservation settings

brightness, adjusting 215

conserving supplies 211

Eco-Mode 212

Hibernate Mode 214

Hibernate Timeout 214

Quiet Mode 212

Schedule Power Modes 215

Sleep Mode 213

conserving supplies 211

contacting customer support 320

content

e-mail settings 107

content source

e-mail settings 107

fax options 128

content type

e-mail settings 107

fax options 128

control panel, printer 15

indicator light 15

Sleep button light 15

controller board accessing 29

copies

copy options 100

copy job, canceling using the ADF 99

using the scanner glass 99

copy options

collate 100

copies 100

darkness 100

save as shortcut 101

sides (duplex) 100

copy quality

adjusting 95

copy screen

content source 100

content type 100

options 99, 100

Copy Settings menu 174

copy troubleshooting

copier does not respond 305

partial document or photo copies 307

poor copy quality 305

poor scanned image quality 317

scanner unit does not close 305, 316

copying

adding an overlay message 98

adjusting quality 95

canceling a copy job 99

collating copies 96

custom job 97

different paper sizes 93

enlarging 94

inserting a header or footer 98

multiple pages on one sheet 97

on both sides of the paper (duplexing) 94

on letterhead 92

on transparencies 91

photos 91

placing separator sheets between copies 96

quick copy 90

reducing 94

selecting a tray 93

to a different size 92

using the ADF 90

using the scanner glass 91

copying different paper sizes 93

copying multiple pages on one sheet 97

copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing) 94

copying on transparencies 91

creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 125

creating an FTP shortcut

using the Embedded Web Server 131

creating custom name paper type 71

creating profiles

using the ScanBack Utility 136

custom name

configuring 72

Custom Names menu 149

custom paper type name assigning 72

Custom Scan Sizes menu 149

Custom Type [x] changing paper type 72 creating custom name 71

Custom Types menu 148

customer support contacting 320

D

darkness

copy options 100

e-mail options 107

fax options 129

scan options 137

date and time, fax setting 122

daylight saving time, setting 122

Default Source menu 140

Defective flash detected [51] 260

delayed send fax options 129

different paper sizes, copying 93

Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) fax setup 114

digital telephone service fax setup 116

directory list printing 88

Disk full 62 260

Disk must be formatted for use in this device 260

disk wiping 218

Disk Wiping menu 162

display troubleshooting printer display is blank 273

display, printer control panel 15 adjusting brightness 215

disposing of printer hard disk 217

distinctive ring service, fax connecting to 121

documents, printing from Macintosh 83 from Windows 83

DSL filter 114

duplexing 94

E

Eco-Mode setting 212

Edit Security Setups menu 160

Embedded Web Server accessing 13, 21

administrator settings 234

checking the status of parts 223

checking the status of supplies 223

creating a fax destination shortcut 125

creating an FTP shortcut 131

creating e-mail shortcuts 103

functions 13

initial fax setup 109

modifying confidential print settings 87

networking settings 234

problem accessing 319

scanning to a computer using 133

setting up e-mail alerts 234 using 13

Embedded Web Server

Administrator's Guide

where to find 220, 234

emission notices 322, 326, 330, 331

encrypting the printer hard disk 219

enlarging a copy 94

envelopes

loading, multipurpose feeder 65 tips 74

environmental settings

conserving supplies 211

display brightness, adjusting 215

Eco-Mode 212

Hibernate Mode 214

Hibernate Timeout 214

Quiet Mode 212

Schedule Power Modes 215

Sleep Mode 213

erasing hard disk memory 218

erasing non-volatile memory 218

erasing volatile memory 217

Error reading USB drive. Remove USB. 260

Error reading USB hub. Remove hub. 260

Ethernet network

preparing to set up for Ethernet printing 51

Ethernet network setup

using Macintosh 51

using Windows 51

Ethernet networking

Macintosh 51

Windows 51

Ethernet port 49

Ethernet setup

preparing for an 51

exporting a configuration

using the Embedded Web Server 27

exterior of the printer

cleaning 221

e-mail

canceling 106

e-mail alerts

low supply levels 234

paper jam 234

setting up 234

e-mail function

setting up 102

e-mail options

darkness 107

message 106

original size 106

page setup 108

recipient(s) 106

resolution 107

send as 107

subject 106

e-mail screen

advanced options 108

options 106, 108

E-mail Settings menu 185

e-mail shortcuts, creating

using the Embedded Web Server 103

e-mail, sending

using a shortcut number 104

using the address book 105

e-mailing

adding message line 105

adding subject line 105

changing output file type 105

configuring e-mail settings 102

creating shortcuts using the

Embedded Web Server 103

creating shortcuts using the printer control panel 103

setting up e-mail function 102

using a shortcut number 104

using the address book 105

using the printer control

panel 104

F

factory defaults

restoring 236

fax

sending 123, 124

fax and e-mail functions

setting up 308

fax and e-mail functions are not set

up 308

fax log

viewing 126

Fax memory full 261

Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)

menu 177

fax name, setting 121

fax number, setting 121

fax options

content source 128

content type 128

darkness 129

delayed send 129

page setup 129

resolution 129

scan preview 130

Fax partition inoperative. Contact

system administrator. 261

fax ports 49

fax screen

advanced options 130

Fax server 'To Format' not set up.

Contact system administrator. 261

fax setup

country- or region-specific 117

digital telephone service 116

DSL connection 114

standard telephone line

connection 110

VoIP 115

Fax Station Name not set up.

Contact system administrator. 261

Fax Station Number not set up.

Contact system administrator. 261

fax troubleshooting

caller ID is not shown 309

can receive but not send faxes 312

can send but not receive

faxes 311

cannot send or receive a fax 309

received fax has poor print quality 313

faxing

blocking junk faxes 127

canceling a fax job 127

changing resolution 126

configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time 122

creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 125

creating shortcuts using the printer control panel 125

distinctive ring service 121

fax setup 109

forwarding faxes 128

holding faxes 127

making a fax lighter or darker 126

sending a fax at a scheduled time 124

sending using the printer control panel 122

setting the date and time 122

setting the fax number 121

setting the outgoing fax name 121

viewing a fax log 126

FCC notices 322, 327, 330

file name

scan options 136

finding more information about the printer 9

finding printer IP address 21

finisher

finishing features 81

supported paper sizes 81

finisher features 81

Finishing menu 199

firmware card 28

flash drive

printing from 84

Flash Drive menu 193

flash drives

supported file types 85

font sample list printing 88

Forms and Favorites setting up 23

forwarding faxes 128

FTP

FTP options 136

FTP address

creating shortcuts using the printer control panel 132

FTP address, scanning to

using a shortcut number 132

using the printer control panel 132

FTP options

advanced options 138

FTP 136

FTP screen

advanced options 101

FTP Settings menu 190

G

General Settings menu 165

green settings

Eco-Mode 212

Hibernate Mode 214

Hibernate Timeout 214

Quiet Mode 212

Schedule Power Modes 215

H

held jobs 86

printing from a Macintosh computer 87

printing from Windows 87

Help menu 209

Hibernate Mode using 214

Hibernate Timeout setting 214

hiding icons on the home screen 21

holding faxes 127

home screen

customizing 21

hiding icons 21

showing icons 21

home screen applications configuring 22

finding information 22

home screen buttons and icons description 16

HTML menu 208

|

icons on the home screen hiding 21

showing 21

Image menu 209

imaging unit

ordering 224

replacing 228

Imaging unit low [84.xy] 261

Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy] 261

Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy] 261

importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 27

in finisher rear door

paper jams, clearing 248, 253

Incompatible tray [x] [59] 262

Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34] 262

initial fax setup 109

using the Embedded Web Server 109

inserting a header or footer 98

installing an Internal Solutions Port 34

installing an optional card 32

installing options

order of installation 45

installing printer hard disk 41

installing printer on a network Ethernet networking 51

installing printer software adding options 48

installing printer software (Windows) 48

installing the 250-sheet tray 45

installing the 550-sheet tray 45

Insufficient memory for Flash

Memory Defragment operation [37] 262

Insufficient memory to collate job [37] 262

Insufficient memory to support

Resource Save feature [35] 263

Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37] 262

Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37] 26

internal options 28

Internal Solutions Port

changing port settings 56

installing 34

troubleshooting 276

IP address of computer finding 20

IP address, printer

finding 21

IPv6 menu 155

J

jams

accessing 238

avoiding 237

understanding messages 238

jams, clearing

finisher bin 248

in automatic document feeder top cover 239

in duplex area 245

in front door 242

in manual feeder 246

in rear door 240

in standard bin 240

in staple access door 248

in stapler door 253

in tray [x] 247

Job Accounting menu 202

L

labels, paper

tips 75

letterhead

copying on 92

loading, multipurpose feeder 65

tips on using 74

light, indicator 15

line filter 114

linking trays 71, 72

Load [paper source] with [custom

string] [paper orientation] 263

Load [paper source] with [custom

type name] [paper orientation] 263

Load [paper source] with [paper

size] [paper orientation] 263

Load [paper source] with [paper

type] [paper size] [paper

orientation] 263

Load Manual Feeder with [custom

string] [paper orientation] 264

Load Manual Feeder with [custom

type name] [paper orientation] 264

Load Manual Feeder with [paper

size] [paper orientation] 264

Load manual feeder with [paper

type] [paper size] [paper

orientation] 264

loading

multipurpose feeder 65

trays 60

loading the optional tray 60

loading the standard tray 60

M

maintenance kit

ordering 225

Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 264

Maintenance kit nearly low

[80.xy] 265

Maintenance kit very low, [x]

estimated pages remain

[80.xy] 265

making copies using paper from

selected tray 93

memory

types installed on printer 217

memory card 28

installing 30

troubleshooting 276

Memory full [38] 265

Memory full, cannot print

faxes 265

Memory full, cannot send

faxes 265

menu settings page

printing 59

menus

Active NIC 151

AppleTalk 156

Confidential Print 162

Configure MP 144

Copy Settings 174

Custom Names 149

Custom Scan Sizes 149

Custom Types 148

Default Source 140

Disk Wiping 162

Edit Security Setups 160

E-mail Settings 185

Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 177

Finishing 199

Flash Drive 193

FTP Settings 190

General Settings 165

Help 209

HTML 208

Image 209

IPv6 155

Job Accounting 202

list of 139

Miscellaneous Security

Settings 161

Network [x] 151

Network Card 153

Network Reports 153

Paper Loading 147

Paper Size/Type 141

Paper Texture 144

Paper Weight 146

PCL Emul 205

PDF 204

PostScript 204

Quality 201

Reports 150

Security Audit Log 163

Set Date/Time 163

Settings 198

SMTP Setup menu 159

Standard Network 151

Standard USB 157

Substitute Size 144

TCP/IP 154

Universal Setup 149

Utilities 203

Wireless 155

XPS 204

message

e-mail options 106

Miscellaneous Security Settings

menu 161

moving the printer 10, 232, 233

Multi Send

adding a profile 25

setting up 25

multipurpose feeder

loading 65

MyShortcut

about 24

N

Network [x] menu 151

Network [x] software error

[54] 265

Network Card menu 153

Network Reports menu 153

network settings

Embedded Web Server 234

network setup page

printing 59

Networking Guide

where to find 234

No analog phone line connected to

modem, fax is disabled. 265

noise emission levels 322

Non-Lexmark [supply type], see

User's Guide [33.xy] 266

non-volatile memory 217 erasing 218

Not enough free space in flash

memory for resources [52] 266

notices 322, 323, 324, 325, 326,

327, 328, 329, 330, 331, 332

number of remaining pages estimate 223

0

optional card

installing 32

optional tray

loading 60

options

250-sheet tray, installing 45

550-sheet tray, installing 45

firmware cards 28

Internal Solutions Port, installing 34

memory card 30

memory cards 28

printer hard disk, installing 41

printer hard disk, removing 44

updating in printer driver 48

options, copy screen

copy from 99

scale 100

options, touch-screen

copy 99

e-mail 106, 108

ordering

imaging unit 224

maintenance kit 225

staple cartridges 225

ordering supplies

toner cartridges 224

original size

e-mail options 106

scan options 136

output file type

changing 105

P

page setup

e-mail options 108

fax options 129

scan options 138

paper

characteristics 76

different sizes, copying 93

letterhead 77

loading, multipurpose feeder 65

preprinted forms 77

recycled 78

saving 97

selecting 77

storing 78

unacceptable 77

Universal size setting 60

Paper changes needed 266

paper feed troubleshooting

message remains after jam is cleared 278

paper jams

avoiding 237

paper jams, clearing

finisher bin 248

in automatic document feeder top cover 239

in duplex area 245

in finisher rear door 248, 253

in front door 242

in manual feeder 246

in rear door 240

in standard bin 240

in staple access door 248

in stapler door 253

in tray [x] 247

paper labels

loading, multipurpose feeder 65

Paper Loading menu 147

paper size

setting 60

Paper Size/Type menu 141

paper sizes

supported 79

paper stop, using 70

Paper Texture menu 144

paper type

setting 60

paper types

supported by printer 80

where to load 80

Paper Weight menu 146

paper weights

supported by printer 80

Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 266

parts

checking status 223

checking, from printer control panel 223

checking, using the Embedded Web Server 223

using genuine Lexmark 223

PCL Emul menu 205

PDF menu 204

Personal Identification Number

method

using 54

phone splitter 115

photos

copying 91

placing separator sheets between

copies 96

port settings

configuring 56

PostScript menu 204

preparing to set up the printer on

an Ethernet network 51

print irregularities 293

print job

canceling, from computer 88

print quality

cleaning the scanner glass 222

print quality troubleshooting blank pages 286

characters have jagged edges 285

clipped pages or images 287

gray background on prints 290

horizontal voids appear on prints 301

print irregularities 293

print is too dark 294

print is too light 296

printer is printing solid black pages 298

repeating print defects appear on prints 294

shadow images appear on prints 289

skewed print 297

streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 299

streaked vertical lines 300

toner fog or background shading 303

toner rubs off 304

toner specks appear on prints 303

transparency print quality is poor 298

uneven print density 304

white streaks 302

print troubleshooting

error reading flash drive 279

held jobs do not print 281

incorrect characters print 283

incorrect margins on prints 291

jammed pages are not reprinted 278

job prints from wrong tray 283

job prints on wrong paper 283

jobs do not print 279

Large jobs do not collate 284

multiple-language PDF files do not print 278

paper curl 292

paper frequently jams 277

print job takes longer than expected 282

tray linking does not work 284

unexpected page breaks occur 285

printer

basic model 11

finishing features 81

fully configured 11

minimum clearances 10

moving 10, 232, 233

selecting a location 10

shipping 233

printer configurations 11

printer control panel 15

factory defaults, restoring 236

indicator light 15

Sleep button light 15

printer control panel, virtual

display

using the Embedded Web Server 234

Printer had to restart. Last job may

be incomplete. 267

printer hard disk

disposing of 217

encrypting 219

installing 41

removing 44

wiping 218

printer hard disk encryption 219

printer hard disk memory

erasing 218

printer information where to find 9

printer IP address finding 21

printer is printing blank pages 286

printer messages

[x]-page jam, remove all pages from the finisher's accumulator. Leave paper in bin. [45y.xx] 253

[x]-page jam, remove all pages from the output bin. Leave paper in bin. [45y.xx] 248

[x]-page jam, clear manual feeder. [25y.xx] 246

[x]-page jam, clear standard bin. [20y.xx] 240

[x]-page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 239

[x]-page jam, open front door. [20y.xx] 242

[x]-page jam, open rear door. [20y.xx] 240

[x]-page jam, open tray [x]. [24y.xx] 247

[x]-page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [23y.xx] 245

Cartridge low [88.xy] 257

Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 258

Cartridge very low, [x] estimated pages remain [88.xy] 258

Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch [41.xy] 257

Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation] 258

Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation] 258

Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation] 258

Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load [orientation] 258

Check tray [x] connection 259

Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job [2yy.xx] 259

Complex page, some data may not have printed [39] 259

Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57] 260

Defective flash detected [51] 260

Disk full 62 260

Disk must be formatted for use in this device 260

Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space. 260

Error reading USB drive. Remove USB. 260

Error reading USB hub. Remove hub. 260

Fax memory full 261

Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator. 261

Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator. 261

Fax Station Name not set up. Contact system administrator. 261

Fax Station Number not set up. Contact system administrator. 261

Imaging unit low [84.xy] 261

Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy] 261

Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy] 261

Incompatible tray [x] [59] 262

Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34] 262

Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation [37] 262

Insufficient memory to collate job [37] 262

Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature [35] 263

Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37] 262

Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37] 262

Load [paper source] with [custom string] [paper orientation] 263

Load [paper source] with [custom type name [paper orientation] 263

Load [paper source] with [paper size] [paper orientation] 263

Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation] 263

Load Manual Feeder with [custom string] [paper orientation] 264

Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name] [paper orientation] 264

Load Manual Feeder with [paper size] [paper orientation] 264

Load manual feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation] 264

Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 264

Maintenance kit nearly low [80.xy] 265

Maintenance kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [80.xy] 265

Memory full [38] 265

Memory full, cannot print faxes 265

Memory full, cannot send faxes 265

Network [x] software error [54] 265

No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled. 265

Non-Lexmark [supply type], see User's Guide [33.xy] 266

Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52] 266

Paper changes needed 266

Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 266

Printer had to restart. Last job may be incomplete. 267

Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge [31.xy] 268

Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit [31.xy] 268

Remove defective disk [61] 267

Remove paper from standard output bin 267

Replace all originals if restarting job. 267

Replace cartridge, 0 estimated pages remain [88.xy] 267

Replace defective imaging unit [31.xy] 267

Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy] 267

Replace maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain [80.xy] 267

Replace unsupported cartridge [32.xy] 268

Replace unsupported imaging unit [32.xy] 268

Restore held jobs? 268

Scanner automatic feeder cover open 269

Scanner disabled by admin [840.01] 269

Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists. [840.02] 269

Scanner jam, remove all originals from the scanner [2yy.xx] 269

Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner [2yy.xx] 269

Serial port [x] disabled [56] 269

SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator. 269

Some held jobs were not restored 269

Standard network software error [54] 270

Standard USB port disabled [56] 270

Supply needed to complete job 270

Too many flash options installed [58] 270

Too many trays attached [58] 270

Unformatted flash detected [53] 271

Unsupported disk 271

Unsupported option in slot [x] [55] 271

Unsupported USB hub, please remove 260

USB port [x] disabled [56] 271

Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator. 271

printer options troubleshooting internal option is not detected 274

Internal Solutions Port 276

memory card 276

tray problems 275

USB/parallel interface card 276

printer problems, solving basic 272 printer security

information on 220

printer software, installing

(Windows) 48

printing

canceling, from the printer control panel 88

directory list 88

font sample list 88

forms 83

from flash drive 84

from Macintosh 83

from Windows 83

menu settings page 59

network setup page 59

printing a directory list 88

printing a document 83

printing a font sample list 88

printing a menu settings page 59

printing a network setup page 59

printing confidential and other held jobs

from a Macintosh computer 87 from Windows 87

printing forms 83

printing from a flash drive 84

publications

where to find 9

Push Button Configuration method using 54

Q

Quality menu 201

Quiet Mode 212

R

recipient(s)

e-mail options 106

recycled paper

using 78

recycling

Lexmark packaging 216

Lexmark products 216

toner cartridges 216

reducing a copy 94

reducing noise 212

Reinstall missing or unresponsive

cartridge [31.xy] 268

Reinstall missing or unresponsive

imaging unit [31.xy] 268

Remote Operator Panel setting up 26

remove all pages from the output bin. Leave paper in bin.

[45y.xx] 248

Remove defective disk [61] 267

Remove paper from standard output bin 267

removing printer hard disk 44

repeat print jobs 86

printing from a Macintosh computer 87

printing from Windows 87

repeating print defects appear on prints 294

Replace all originals if restarting job. 267

Replace cartridge, 0 estimated

pages remain [88.xy] 267

Replace defective imaging unit [31.xy] 267

Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy] 267

Replace maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain

[80.xy] 267

Replace unsupported cartridge [32.xy] 268

Replace unsupported imaging unit [32.xy] 268

replacing

imaging unit 228

toner cartridge 226

replacing supplies

staple cartridge 230

replacing the staple cartridge 230

reports

viewing 234

Reports menu 150

reserve print jobs 86

printing from a Macintosh computer 87

printing from Windows 87

resolution

e-mail options 107

fax options 129

scan options 137

resolution, fax

changing 126

Restore held jobs? 268

restoring factory default settings 236

RJ-11 adapter 117

S

safety information 7, 8

save as shortcut

copy options 101

scan options 136

saving paper 97

scan options

darkness 137

file name 136

original size 136

page setup 138

resolution 137

save as shortcut 136

scan preview 138

send as 137

scan preview

fax options 130

scan options 138

scan screen

content source 137

content type 137

Scan to Computer

setting up 134

Scan to Network

setting up 26

using 131

scan troubleshooting

cannot scan from a computer 318

partial document or photo scans 318

scan job was not successful 315

scanner unit does not

close 305, 316

scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 316

ScanBack Utility

using 136

scanner

automatic document feeder (ADF) 14

functions 14

scanner glass 14

Scanner automatic feeder cover

open 269

Scanner disabled by admin

[840.01] 269

Scanner disabled. Contact system

administrator if problem persists.

[840.02] 269

scanner glass

cleaning 222

copying using 91

Scanner jam, remove all originals

from the scanner [2yy.xx] 269

Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner

[2yy.xx] 269

scanning

from a flash drive 135

quick copy 90

to a computer 134

to a computer using the

Embedded Web Server 133

to an FTP address 132

scanning to a computer 134

using the Embedded Web Server 133

scanning to a flash drive 135

scanning to an FTP address

creating shortcuts using the computer 131

using a shortcut number 132

using the address book 132

using the printer control panel 132

scanning to network

destinations 131

Schedule Power Modes using 215

security

modifying confidential print settings 87

Security Audit Log menu 163

security slot 49

security Web page

where to find 220

selecting a location for the printer 10

selecting paper 77

send as

e-mail options 107

scan options 137

sending a fax 123

sending a fax using the printer

control panel 122

sending an e-mail using the printer

control panel 104

sending fax

using shortcuts 123

using the address book 124

sending fax at a scheduled

time 124

sending fax using the address

book 124

Serial port [x] disabled [56] 269

serial printing

setting up 57

Set Date/Time menu 163

setting

TCP/IP address 154

setting Hibernate Timeout 214

setting the fax number 121

setting the outgoing fax name 121

setting the paper size 60

setting the paper type 60

setting the Universal paper size 60

setting up e-mail alerts 234

setting up fax

country- or region-specific 117

digital telephone service 116

DSL connection 114

standard telephone line connection 110

VoIP connection 115

setting up fax and e-mail

functions 308

setting up serial printing 57

setting up the printer

on an Ethernet network (Macintosh only) 51

on an Ethernet network (Windows only) 51

Settings menu 198

shipping the printer 233

shortcuts, creating e-mail 103

fax destination 125

FTP address 132

FTP destination 131

showing icons on the home

screen 21

sides (duplex) copy options 100

Sleep Mode adjusting 213

SMTP server not set up. Contact

system administrator. 269

SMTP Setup menu 159

Some held jobs were not restored 269

standard bin, using 70

Standard Network menu 151

Standard network software error 54] 270

standard tray

loading 60

Standard USB menu 157

Standard USB port disabled

[56] 270

staple cartridge replacing 230

staple cartridges ordering 225

statement of volatility 217

status of parts checking 223

status of supplies checking 223

storing

paper 78 supplies 225

storing print jobs 86

streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 299

streaked vertical lines appear on

prints 300

streaks appear 302

subject and message information adding to e-mail 105

Substitute Size menu 144

supplies checking status 223

checking, from printer control panel 223

checking, using the Embedded Web Server 223

conserving 211

storing 225

using genuine Lexmark 223

supplies, ordering ADF separator roller 225

imaging unit 224 maintenance kit 225

staple cartridges 225 toner cartridges 224

Supply needed to complete job 270

supply notifications configuring 235

supported flash drives 85

supported paper sizes 79

T

TCP/IP menu 154

telecommunication

notices 327, 328, 329

the scanner does not respond 314

tips

card stock 75

envelopes 74

labels, paper 75

letterhead 74

transparencies 74

toner cartridge replacing 226

toner cartridges

ordering 224

recycling 216

toner darkness adjusting 83

Too many flash options installed [58] 270

Too many trays attached [58] 270

touch screen buttons 18

transparencies copying on 9:

loading, multipurpose feeder 65 tips 74

trays

linking 71, 72

loading 60

unlinking 71, 72

troubleshooting

an application error has occurred 319

cannot open Embedded Web Server 319

checking an unresponsive printer 272

contacting customer support 320

fax and e-mail functions are not set up 308

solving basic printer problems 272

the scanner does not respond 314

troubleshooting, color quality

prints on color transparencies appear dark when projected 288

troubleshooting, copy copier does not respond 305

partial document or photo copies 307

poor copy quality 305

poor scanned image quality 317 scanner unit does not close 305, 316

troubleshooting, display printer display is blank 273

troubleshooting, fax

caller ID is not shown 309

can receive but not send faxes 312

can send but not receive faxes 311

cannot send or receive a fax 309

received fax has poor print quality 313

troubleshooting, paper feed

message remains after jam is cleared 278

troubleshooting, print

error reading flash drive 279

held jobs do not print 281

incorrect characters print 283

incorrect margins on prints 291

jammed pages are not reprinted 278

job prints from wrong tray 283

job prints on wrong paper 283

jobs do not print 279

Large jobs do not collate 284

multiple-language PDF files do not print 278

paper curl 292

paper frequently jams 277

print job takes longer than expected 282

tray linking does not work 284

unexpected page breaks occur 285

troubleshooting, print quality blank pages 286

characters have jagged edges 285

clipped pages or images 287

gray background on prints 290

horizontal voids appear on prints 301

print irregularities 293

print is too dark 294

print is too light 296

printer is printing solid black pages 298

repeating print defects appear on prints 294

shadow images appear on prints 289

skewed print 297

streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 299

streaked vertical lines 300

toner fog or background shading 303

toner rubs off 304

toner specks appear on prints 303

transparency print quality is poor 298

uneven print density 304

white streaks on a page 302

troubleshooting, printer options

internal option is not detected 274

Internal Solutions Port 276

memory card 276

tray problems 275

USB/parallel interface card 276

troubleshooting, scan

cannot scan from a computer 318

partial document or photo scans 318

scan job was not successful 315

scanner unit does not close 305, 316

scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 316

U

unacceptable paper 77

understanding the home screen

buttons and icons 16

uneven print density 304

Unformatted flash detected [53] 271

Universal Paper Size setting 60

Universal paper size setting 60

Universal Setup menu 149

unlinking trays 71, 72

Unsupported option in slot [x] [55] 271

Unsupported USB hub, please remove 260

updating options in printer driver 48

USB port 49

USB port [x] disabled [56] 271

USB/parallel interface card troubleshooting 276

using a shortcut number scanning to an FTP address 132

using Forms and Favorites 83

using Hibernate Mode 214

using Schedule Power Modes 215

using shortcuts

sending fax 123

using the address book 105 sending fax 124

using the Embedded Web Server 13

using the ScanBack Utility 136

using the touch-screen buttons 18

Utilities menu 203

v

verify print jobs 86

printing from a Macintosh computer 87

printing from Windows 87

vertical voids appear 302

viewing

reports 234

viewing a fax log 126

virtual display checking, using Embedded Web Server 234

voice mail

setting up 110

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) fax setup 115

voids appear 302

VoIP adapter 115

volatile memory 217 erasing 217

volatility

statement of 217

W

Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator. 271

wiping the printer hard disk 218

Wireless menu 155

wireless network configuration information 53

wireless network setup using the Embedded Web Server 55

wireless setup wizard using 54

X

XPS menu 204